JP7121077B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine for executing games.

Conventionally, as a technique related to this type of gaming machine, a technique is known in which a look-ahead effect prohibition section is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of fluctuation.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-202068

In recent years, only similar gaming machines have been proposed, and novel gaming machines are desired.

Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a novel gaming machine.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. It should be noted that the following phrases and solutions in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of the invention-specifying matters shown in the following means for solving the problem. Furthermore, each of the matters specifying the invention shown in the following solutions can be converted into a higher-level concept by adding elements that limit the matters specifying the invention, or can be made into a higher-level concept by deleting elements that limit the matters specifying the invention. .

Solution 1: The game machine of the present solution includes a variable ball entry device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state, and a special game execution for executing a special game using the variable ball entry device when a predetermined lottery is won. and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect triggered by the ball entry when a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game, wherein the specific effect execution means performs a predetermined The gaming machine is characterized in that when a condition is set, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game, the specific effect may not be executed.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A variable ball entry device (special electric accessory, normal electric accessory) that can shift from the closed state to the open state is provided.
(2) If you win a predetermined lottery (special pattern lottery, normal pattern lottery) (when you win a jackpot, a small win, or a normal pattern), a special game (big win game, small win) is played using the variable ball entry device in (1) above. Hit game, normal electric accessory open game) is executed.

(3) When the game ball enters the variable ball entry device of (1) above during execution of the special game of (2) above, a specific effect (cut-in effect) is executed with the entry of the ball as a trigger. The specific effect may be executed at the same time as the ball is entered, or may be executed after a certain period of time has elapsed after the ball is entered.

(4) When a predetermined condition is set (when a predetermined time has passed (70F after the start of the small win, 95F after the start of the small win), when the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect is ON , When the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is ON), even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry device of (1) during the execution of the special game of (2), the above ( There are cases where the specific effect of 3) is not executed.

According to this solution means, when the predetermined condition is set, the specific performance may not be executed, so it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific performance by setting the predetermined condition, and as a result, the game machine is novel. can be provided. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid executing the specific effect at a late stage during execution of the special effect, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Solution 2: In any one of the above-described solution means, the gaming machine of the present solution means has a first specific effect and a second specific effect, and the predetermined condition is the first specific effect. and a second predetermined condition not to execute the second specific effect, wherein the second predetermined condition precedes the first predetermined condition The game machine is characterized in that the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may end at the same time.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) Specific effects include a first specific effect and a second specific effect.
(2) The predetermined conditions include a first predetermined condition under which the first specific effect is not executed and a second predetermined condition under which the second specific effect is not executed.
(3) The second predetermined condition is set prior to the first predetermined condition.
(4) The first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may end at the same time.

According to this solving means, since the specific performance is controlled by two predetermined conditions, it is possible to flexibly cope with the situation in which the specific performance is executed multiple times, and as a result, to provide a novel game machine. can be done.

Solution 3: The game machine of the present solution means is a game machine characterized in that, in any one of the above-described solution means, the specific effect is executed according to a predetermined rule when executed a plurality of times.

In this solution means, when the specific effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed according to a predetermined rule (the rule that images are displayed alternately to the left and right). For example, even if a specific effect is not executed due to the setting of a prescribed condition, it is executed according to a prescribed rule (even if the part where the image is displayed from the right is not executed, the image is displayed from the right next time).

According to this solving means, the specific effect is executed according to a predetermined rule, so that not only is it possible to maintain the continuity of the effect, but also it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

Solution F1: The gaming machine of the present solution includes a variable ball entry device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state, and a special game execution for executing a special game using the variable ball entry device when a predetermined lottery is won. and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect triggered by the ball entry when a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game, wherein the specific effect execution means performs a predetermined When a condition is set, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game, the specific effect may not be executed. and an outer frame to which the body frame can be attached, the body frame having a handle, the handle having a finger hook, and the handle being rotatable from an initial position to a maximum rotation position. , when the handle is at the initial position, the finger hook does not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame, and when the handle is at the maximum rotation position, the finger hook does not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame.

According to this solving means, even when the body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hooking portion does not come into contact with the floor or the like, and the handle is not damaged. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of component damage.

Solution Means F2: The gaming machine of this solution means includes a variable ball entry device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state, and a special game execution that executes a special game using the variable ball entry device when a predetermined lottery is won. and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect triggered by the ball entry when a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game, wherein the specific effect execution means performs a predetermined When a condition is set, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game, the specific effect may not be executed, and a front frame having a design part formed on the upper part a game board on which a game area having a left-handed area and a right-handed area is formed; and a game board disposed above the game area, having an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface, and guiding a game ball to the right-handed area. Among the lines extending perpendicular to the guide path and the board surface of the game board, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as a first reference line, and among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line can intersect, The rearmost portion of the lower surface of the design portion is defined as the first design portion, and the lowermost portion of the lower surface of the design portion among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line intersect is designated as the second design portion. Then, the first design portion is positioned below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and the second design portion is positioned below the first reference line. The gaming machine is positioned below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball.

According to this solution means, the second design portion is located below the first reference line and the distance from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can be done. In addition, while increasing the size of the design part in this way, by making the distance between the first reference line and the first design part equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball is hit strongly (the upper surface of the game ball passage When the game ball rolls along), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
In addition, the solving means F1 and F2 can exhibit the effect of the solving means 1 mentioned above. Moreover, the features of the above-described solving means 2 and 3 can be added to the solving means F1 and F2.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. FIG. 11 is a flowchart (1/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart (2/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing; FIG. 7 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of a procedure of power failure occurrence check processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of interrupt management processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of switch input event processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st special design memory|storage update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 2nd special design memory|storage update process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect determination processing at the time of acquisition; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol game process. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol game process. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning device. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction state) when the first special symbol is off. It is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern selection table (low-probability time reduction state) when the first special symbol is lost. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state) when the first special symbol is lost. It is a diagram showing a second special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time reduction/low-probability time reduction state). The second special symbol is a deviation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 1st special design big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design big hit. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction state) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction state) at the time of the second special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state) at the time of the second special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state) at the time of the second special symbol jackpot. It is a diagram showing a second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time reduction/low-probability time reduction state). It is a second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the correspondence table|surface of an internal lottery. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for a number-of-times counter value management process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of special design storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process during special design fluctuation|variation. It is a timing chart showing changes in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process during a special design stop display. 6 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of display output management processing; It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable prize-winning apparatus management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to a "9 round normal symbol" or a "9 round probability variable symbol" in normal mode. It is a diagram for explaining the game flow that is developed when the "16 round probability variation pattern" or "9 round probability variation pattern" is applied in the fireworks rush. FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing a first example of a fireworks rush effect (1/3); It is a continuous diagram showing a first production example of the fireworks rush (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing a first production example of the fireworks rush (3/3). (1/7) is a continuous diagram showing a second example of the fireworks rush effect. It is a continuation diagram which shows the example of the 2nd production|presentation of a fireworks rush (2/7). It is a continuous diagram showing a second example of the fireworks rush production (3/7). It is a continuous diagram showing a second example of the fireworks rush effect (4/7). It is a continuation diagram showing a second example of the fireworks rush effect (5/7). It is a continuation diagram showing a second example of the fireworks rush effect (6/7). FIG. 7 is a continuous diagram showing a second example of the fireworks rush effect (7/7); It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design management processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of production management processing during a fireworks rush (1/3). It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of production management processing during a fireworks rush (2/3). It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of production management processing during a fireworks rush (3/3). 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of count-up counter calculation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a cut-in effect lottery process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of characters displayed in a cut-in effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an overview of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is 1 frame; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an overview of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is two frames; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an overview of the flow from the count-up SE reproduction with the number of prize balls of 9 and the update interval of 1F to the count-up SE stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an overview of the flow from count-up SE reproduction with 7 prize balls and an update interval of 2F to count-up SE stop. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of cut-in production|presentation operation|movement at the time of winning by the small hit in a small hit rush. It is a diagram showing the outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a small prize after the second cut-in effect prohibition timing has elapsed. It is a diagram showing the outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a small prize after the first cut-in effect prohibition timing has elapsed. It is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of other embodiments. It is a front view showing a game board unit of another embodiment alone. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 78; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outer rail; It is a figure which shows a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball contacts an outer rail. It is a figure which shows an outer rail and a game board. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 0 degrees (minimum angle); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 100 degrees (maximum angle); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 1). FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 2).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. can be converted into a game value based on the number of Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 (left edge in FIG. 2) as viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side locks the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the lock. It disables the opening of 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. In the lower tray 6c, the game balls put out while the upper tray 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to a CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are sent from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. Dispensed onto the tray 6b or lower tray 6c).

A lending operation section 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation section 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of degrees (for example, 5 degrees) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. Although the CR machine is used as an example in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) other than the CR machine.

On the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is provided in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. Further, the player can drop and eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by sliding the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e leftward, for example. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . A player can operate the shooting control board set 174 by operating the handle unit 16 to shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The configuration of the inside of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 are provided with glass frame top speakers 54 and 55, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2 . These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

Also, in the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed in front of the upper tray 6b. The player presses and operates the effect switching button 45 to switch the effect contents (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, during the fluctuation of the pattern, during the confirmation display of the big win, or during the big win game. It is possible to generate some kind of production (notice production, probability change promotion production, promotion production during big role, etc.).

Furthermore, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main controller so as to be visible in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204. .

The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays the base. In addition, the performance display monitor 200 displays setting values (set values).

The four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment positioned to the lower right of the 7 segments. It is composed by
Performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used when clearing the RAM (initializing the RAM 76), ie, initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main controller. A setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to settings.

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for performing RAM clear, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, a RAM clear signal is input to the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92, RAM clear processing is executed. Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power control unit 162 . Further, when the RAM clear signal is not input to the payout control device 92 and the main control device 70 receives the input of the RAM clear signal, the main control device 70 transmits the RAM clear command to the payout control device 92. good too.

Note that the arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are only examples, and they can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be arranged outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, pattern confirmation number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) representing the progress state, maintenance state, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 has a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a substantially circular firing rail (no reference numeral).

In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁The left part of the game area 8a is used in the first game state (for example, low-probability non-time shortening state, low-probability time shortening state, jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 30 operates, left-handed state, etc.). 1 game area (left-handed area), the right part of the game area 8a is the second game state (for example, the jackpot game state in which the second variable winning device 31 operates, the small winning state in which the second variable winning device 31 operates It is the second game area (right hitting area, game area) used in the game state, high probability non-time shortening state, right hitting state, etc.). In addition, in the game area 8a, around the effect unit 40, there are an upper starting winning opening 26, a right starting winning opening 27 (first winning opening), a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first A variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31 (second winning opening), a deceleration passage 400, etc. are distributed and installed.

Among them, the upper starting winning port 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 are arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the first variable winning device 30 is arranged under the variable starting winning device 28. . On the other hand, the right starting winning port 27, the deceleration passage 400 and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a. In addition, the starting gate 20 is arranged in the upper left portion of the game area 8a, and the three normal winning openings 22 are arranged in the lower left portion of the game area 8a.

The deceleration passage 400 is arranged between the right start prize winning port 27 and the second variable prize winning device 31, and is a passage through which game balls that have not entered the right start prize winning port 27 pass. The deceleration passage 400 has two entrances and one exit, and the passage in the middle is a passage that causes the game ball to turn left and right (to meander left and right).

In addition, a plurality of projections 21 are arranged inside the deceleration passage 400 for decelerating the moving speed of the game ball. The plurality of protrusions 21 are alternately arranged on the front side and the rear side with respect to the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit.

For example, the projection on the front side is arranged on the front side of the game board unit (for example, the back surface of the cover of the front transparent member constituting the deceleration passage 400), and the projection on the rear side is arranged on the rear side of the game board unit. side (for example, the surface on the front side of the cover of the back transparent member that constitutes the deceleration passage 400).

In this way, since the plurality of projections 21 are alternately arranged in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit 8, the game balls flowing down at random can be caused to advance in a zigzag manner. can improve the deceleration effect of
In addition, the plurality of projections 21 are appropriately arranged in locations other than the inside of the deceleration passage 400 where deceleration of the game ball is required (for example, the upper part of the opening/closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31, etc.). .

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the normal winning opening 22, the upper starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, or enters the opening operation. The variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

The game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 22, enters the upper starting winning opening 26, or enters the variable starting at the time of opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball will land in the winning device 28 or the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a may enter mainly the right start winning opening 27 or the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but the upper starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the normal winning opening 22, the variable starting winning apparatus 28, the first variable winning apparatus 30, A game ball entering the second variable prize winning device 31 is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board 8b (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. that constitute the game board unit 8).

The variable starting prize winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, the lower starting prize winning port 28b Enables entry (normal electric accessories). The variable start-up winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening/closing members 28a, and these opening/closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). . That is, as shown in the figure, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball into the lower start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the variable start-up winning device 28 operates, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the width of the opening of the variable start-up winning device 28 is expanded to the left and right. During this time, game balls can easily flow into the lower start winning opening 28b. In addition, the variable starting prize device 28 is a tongue-type device in which the opening/closing member moves from a position in which the opening/closing member is retracted to a position protruding forward from the board surface, or a device in which the opening/closing member moves forward using the lower edge of the opening/closing member as a hinge. It may be a device that displaces so as to fall down.

The first variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 9-round normal symbol and a 9-round probability variable symbol), and the first big winning port 30b Enable ball entry (special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 is a variable ball entry device that can shift from a closed state to an open state.

The first variable prize winning device 30 (attacker) is a device arranged below the upper starting prize winning port 26 and has one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is opened/closed by reciprocating back and forth with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b. When the first variable prize winning device 30 is activated, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge to open the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not difficult (easy or possible), and the event of winning into the first big winning hole 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b.

When the second variable winning device 31 (attacker) is in a special gaming state (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 16-round probability variable pattern, or when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit) ) to enable the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b (special electric accessory, second special ball-entering event generating means). The second variable winning device 31 is a variable ball entry device that can shift from a closed state to an open state.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged below the deceleration passage 400 and has one opening/closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is of a type in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is difficult to enter (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which it is not difficult for game balls to flow in, and an event of a ball entering the second big winning hole 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guiding passage 31c is arranged for guiding a game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 inside. The guide passage 31c branches into two routes, and each route is provided with a second count switch 85. As shown in FIG.
A game ball entering the second variable prize winning device 31 is detected by any of the second count switches 85, and finally guided to the discharge port 31f and collected inside.

The game board unit 8 is provided with the effect unit 40 at its central position. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and has various decorative parts (including those not shown) inside. The decorative part enhances the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED, etc.). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the production unit 40, and various production images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including production patterns corresponding to special patterns. . Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. - 特許庁

In addition, inside the effect unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f for effect. The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. The effect using these movable bodies 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the upper start winning opening 26 directly below. .

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not enter (win a prize) in various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32.例文帳に追加In addition, the game area including the game ball that entered the normal winning opening 22, the upper starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the lower starting winning opening 28b, the first variable winning apparatus 30, and the second variable winning apparatus 31 All the game balls hit inside 8a are recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8. - 特許庁The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 4 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, in the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a are provided at the lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided.

Among them, the normal design display device 33 alternately lights two lamps (LEDs), for example, to variably display the normal design, and stops displaying the normal design by lighting or extinguishing the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 by a combination of extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of two lamps (LED), for example. For example, in the display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is lit, the stored number is displayed as 1, and in the display mode where the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to form the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

Each time a game ball passes through the starting gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in the sense of memorizing the passage that triggers the operation lottery. (up to 4), and with the passage as a trigger, the display mode changes to the display mode after the decrease by 1 each time the variation of the normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to fluctuate (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol variation has not yet started at that time.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display the fluctuation state and the stop state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by, for example, 7-segment LEDs (with dots), respectively. (first symbol display means, second symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

In addition, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a are, for example, two lamps (LED) extinguished or lit, depending on the display mode composed of a combination of blinking, each 0 to 4 (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is lit, the stored number is displayed as 1, and in the display mode where the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, every time a game ball enters the upper start winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning apparatus 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b), the upper starting winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning opening 28 ( In order to memorize that the game ball entered the lower start winning hole 28b), the display mode changes to the display mode after the number increases one by one (up to four), and the special pattern changes with the entry of the ball. Each time is started, the display mode changes to the one after the decrease by one. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the right starting winning opening 27, the game ball enters the right starting winning opening 27. (up to 4), and every time the special symbol starts to change with the entry ball as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (at the time of stop display) and the upper start winning opening 26 Alternatively, even if the game ball enters the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball enters the right start winning opening 27 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to fluctuate (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if the ball is thrown. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of entering balls whose variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. represents the number of times

In addition, the gaming state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, probability variation state display lamp 38d, time saving state display lamp 38e, and firing position designation lamp 38f. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are mounted on one integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8. - 特許庁

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation, and this main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. there is The main controller 70 is incorporated in the main control board unit 170 described above.

In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. RWM) 76 or the like is integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77 . Of these, the random number generator 75 is for generating a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for judging the jackpot of the special symbol lottery or the winning judgment of the normal symbol lottery. is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77 . In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input/output (I/O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter/timer circuit (CTC), and the like. Mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or an inner layer portion).

Further, the main controller 70 is provided with a setting change device 300 , a setting key switch 302 and a RAM clear switch 304 . The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes settings by operating the setting change device 300. FIG. The setting change device 300 is a device for switching settings (at least settings relating to the probability of winning a special symbol lottery), and operates by operating the RAM clear switch 304 provided in the pachinko machine 1 (setting change means). Also, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Furthermore, the operating probability means the probability of displaying a combination of special symbols that will activate the conditional device (that will result in the execution of the jackpot game). The setting key switch 302 is an input device for inputting a signal (ON/OFF) indicating the rotation state of the setting key, which is essential for switching settings, as the setting key is rotated. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the following procedure can be used.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with a special key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7. As shown in FIG.
(3) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 and the setting key is pressed. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

When the power is turned on while the setting key is rotated rightward while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on, the setting value can be changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation state, setting reference state).

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to, for example, one of six steps.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, the performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment LED, or the gaming state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.).

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, lever ON processing is required. direction, turning on a setting change confirmation button (not shown), etc.), or the lever ON process may be omitted. In this embodiment, once the desired setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to its original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to its original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key keyhole. By this operation, if the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, dedicated 7-segment LED, game state display device 38, or the like, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is closed. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, a normal game is started.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Details of setting change]
The details of the setting change are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", the "inner frame open state", and the "RAM clear switch depressed state", the setting is changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
When the settings are being changed, there is no display on the main display (various lamps included in the game state display device 38), and no game balls can be shot or game balls can be won.

In this case, the left two 7-segment LEDs (identification segments) of the performance display monitor 200 display "rn." be. Also, when the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1-6.

When the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is extinguished (not displayed), such as "blank (non-display) 1" for the display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state during setting change is terminated, and once it shifts to the state before the power is turned off, it becomes a playable state. Transition.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are used together has been described, but a setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304 .

[Details of setting confirmation]
The details of setting confirmation (see setting) are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", the "inner frame open state", and the "RAM clear switch not depressed", the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered.
As in the state of changing settings, in the state of checking settings, there is no display on the main display, and no game balls can be shot or game balls can be won.

In this case, the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segments) on the left side of the performance display monitor show "rn." is displayed. Also, while the settings are being checked, even if the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set values do not change.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of checking the settings is terminated, and the After shifting to the state, it shifts to the playable state.
In this embodiment, setting confirmation cannot be performed in the playable state, but setting confirmation may be performed in the playable state.

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the upper starting winning port 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning port 28b), the right starting winning port 27, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 respectively. An upper starting winning opening switch 80, a lower starting winning opening switch 82, a right starting winning opening switch 83, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each of the starting winning opening switches 80, 82, 83 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the upper starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning opening device 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b), and the right starting winning opening 27. be. Also, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of game balls into the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning hole) and counting the number. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of game balls into the second variable prize winning device 31 (second big prize winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof. As for the two second count switches 85, the configuration using a common switch is taken as an example, but two switches may be installed to individually detect the entry of a game ball.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning opening 22 . Regarding the three normal winning openings 22, the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is taken as an example, but for example, three winning opening switches are installed and the game ball enters each normal winning opening 22. may be detected individually.

In any case, winning detection signals from these switches 78, 80, 82, 83, 84, 85 and 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the upper start winning slot switch 80, the lower starting winning slot switch 82, and the right starting winning slot switch 83 have the most direct effect on the player's profits. Since it is a signal that exerts an influence, it is transmitted to the main controller 70 without a relay, and other detection signals are transmitted to the main controller 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87 . The panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying respective winning detection signals.

Also, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99 . In the game board unit 8, a normal winning opening 22, an upper starting winning opening 26, a right starting winning opening 27, a lower starting winning opening 28b, a first large winning opening 30b, a second large winning opening 31b, and an out opening 32 are passed. A merging passage for merging game balls is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in this merging passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the merging passage, and a detection signal is input to the main controller 70 each time a game ball is detected. Main controller 70 counts the number of out balls based on the detection signal input from out switch 99 . Here, since the game balls shot into the game area 8a are always discharged outside the pachinko machine 1 through the confluence passage, the out switch 99 determines the number of shot balls shot into the game area 8a, That is, the number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

The above-described normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87 .

A performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87 . The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation state of the base, and controls the lighting state of the 7 segments 201-204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, it may be connected to the main controller 70 without the panel relay terminal board 87. , the performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main controller 70 .

In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, a first large winning opening solenoid 90 and a A second big winning opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 are operated (excited) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and open and close (operate) the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, respectively. Let Control signals for these solenoids 88 , 90 , 97 are also transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87 .

In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4 and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7 . When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When detecting the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is equipped on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and this payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI integrated with a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) and a payout device board 100 are installed in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172. The payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. there is The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the indicated number of game balls from the prize ball case. let out The game balls that have been put out are sent to the receiving tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173 .

In addition, for example, a payout road ball disconnect switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102 . Each time the payout motor 102 is driven to actually pay out the prize balls, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 . Also, when the ball runs out at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100 . The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged to the upper tray 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is filled with game balls, more game balls are dispensed. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Furthermore, when the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is thereby turned on, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball motions even if a prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out in the RAM 98.例文帳に追加The memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, so even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. .

Also, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. - 特許庁Also, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6 . The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the aforementioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the receiving tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the launcher case. Also, the shooting solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the shooting position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. In addition, the shooting interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114 and a firing stop switch . Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (firing handle) from changes in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal therefor. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the receiving tray unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted via the firing relay terminal plate 118 to the firing control board 108. sent to. A drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal plate 118 . When the player operates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength of hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the shooting relay terminal plate 118, and if the CR unit is not connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, the shooting relay terminal plate 118 is also connected. The drive circuit on control board 108 stops driving firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123 . Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the above-described frequency display unit indicator (three-digit seven-segment LED). In addition, the lending and returning switch board 123 is mounted with switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the returning button 12, respectively. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . Also, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit or when the remaining points of the inserted valuable medium become 0, the display circuit of the point display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium ) can also be displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a performance control device 124 (computer for controlling performance) as a control configuration. This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 . The performance control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which a performance control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The production control CPU 126 incorporates a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. Note that the effect control device 124 is provided at a position on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and covered by the back cover unit 178 .

The performance control device 124 is equipped with an input/output driver and various peripheral ICs (not shown), as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and a sound driving circuit 134 . The production control CPU 126 controls the production based on the production command sent from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 to light the various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. Also, processing for actually outputting sound effects, voices, etc. from the speakers 54 , 55 , 56 is performed.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via a communication harness (not shown), for example. However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In addition, the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O) A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown). ) to manage its operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50 and 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8 for decoration and presentation. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the effect unit or the LED built in the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30, the second variable prize winning device 31, and the like. Here, an example in which the glass-framed decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass-framed decorative board 136 is given. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132 through the substrate.

The sound drive circuit 134 is a sound generator containing, for example, a sound ROM, a sound control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown).

In this embodiment, a glass-framed electric board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the driving signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 are sent to various lamps 46 via the glass-framed electric board 136. 52 and speakers 54, 55 and 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136 , and when the player operates the effect switching button 45 , the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame electric decoration board 136 . is entered. Further, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame illumination board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illumination board 136. . Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the glass-framed illumination board 136 is given. It may be connected to the substrate.

In addition, a panel electric decoration board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8 , and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel electric decoration board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53 . The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board surface lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138 .

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8 , and the display screen thereof can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 . In addition, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power applied to the backlight of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, a cold cathode tube). Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. FIG. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 as a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 as a display processor is mounted. Among them, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). A part of the storage area of the VRAM 156 can be used as a frame buffer.

The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program relating to the control of the effect, and the effect control CPU 126 executes control of the effect according to this program. Control of effects includes control of effects using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and control of effects by image display using liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a specific image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs further detailed control signals to the VDP 152 . The VDP 152 having received this accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads the necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156 . Furthermore, the VDP 152 develops the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) into a frame buffer, and converts each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here. drive separately.

In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7 . This power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.). The power generated by the power control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70 , the payout control device 92 , the performance control device 124 and the inverter board 158 . Further, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the terminal board 120 for lending equipment such as game balls. Low-voltage power (for example, DC +5V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166 as described above.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. is output to the outside from The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72 ) and payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94 ) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160 . Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are counted by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. In addition, although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 .
The above is an example of the configuration relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the setting value is "1", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/299".
When the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/259".
When the setting value is "5", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/219".

When the setting value is "1" to "6", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (high probability state) is "1/100".

Thus, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state), which is advantageous for the player.

In the example shown in the figure, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described as an example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided in the high probability state. Moreover, as for the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be provided with a setting difference. Furthermore, other items (for example, the rate of transition to a high probability state, the rate of transition to a time reduction state, the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of time reduction, the number of special variations, etc.) may be provided with a setting difference.

Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main controller 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts reset start processing. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power shutdown, or by clearing the backup information. This process is for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

7 and 8 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of reset start processing. Each procedure of the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector type interrupt mode (mode 2) and modifies the default RST type interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, the main control CPU 72 can thereafter refer to any address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the specified interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a reset standby process here. This process secures a certain amount of waiting time (for example, about several thousand milliseconds) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checks the main power interruption detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power failure detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitor IC, which is a peripheral device. When the input of the main power interruption detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to protect the system even if the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 initializes the mask register to set the interrupt mask. Specifically, a value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the previously saved input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switched ON). If the RAM clear switch has not been operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup was successfully completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including use-prohibited area and stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the sum check result is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, "0000H").
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command that was waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurred.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes effect control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 to the effect control device 124, a return command (for example, model designation command, special pattern probability state designation command, special figure destination determination effect command, working memory number increase production command, working memory number At the time of decrease production command, times cut counter value command, special game state designation command, etc.) is transmitted. In response to this, the effect control device 124 changes the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, internal probability state, display mode of the effect pattern, effect display mode of the working memory number, sound output content, various lamps light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, the display mode of special symbols, the internal probability state, working memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc.). Also, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the PC register that was backed up.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), if the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or if the backup information is not normal (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the storage contents of the RAM 76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents thereof are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU72 also initializes the RAM76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 outputs a command (a command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command to the payout control device 92 to start paying out prize balls.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing to initialize the CTC (counter/timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and also sets an interrupt count value (eg 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when the next CTC interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the program address of the backed-up PC register.

After executing the above procedure in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 8 (connection symbol A→A).

Steps S118 and S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts, and then executes power failure check processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power interruption detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power interruption (drop in drive voltage). When a power cutoff occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97, etc., and backs up the RAM 76 work area. Back up the entire contents except for the validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops processing (NOP). On the other hand, if power shutdown does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. It should be noted that there is a well-known example of programming that causes the CPU to execute such processing when power failure occurs as non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot design random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) except for the jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and the hit determination random numbers corresponding to normal symbols (hardware random numbers) is generated programmatically. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 10). ) is changed. The initial value update random number is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. The reason why step S120 is executed after prohibiting interrupts in step S118 is that the same processing is executed in another interrupt management processing (step S202 in FIG. 10). ) is to prevent As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update period thereof is faster than the timer interrupt period (eg, several ms). (for example, several μs), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot determination random number and the winning determination random number.

Steps S121, S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interrupts and executes random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning types (hit types) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 10). The content of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 9 is a flow chart specifically showing a procedure example of the above-described power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets the conditions for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power interruption detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power interruption detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power interruption detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, a main power disconnection detection switch is mounted, for example, in the main controller 70. This main power disconnection detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power supply disconnection detection signal is output. Note that the main power disconnection detection switch may be incorporated in the power control unit 162 . When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power interruption detection signal is not output at this time (No), it exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the main power disconnection detection signal has been output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether the result is 0 or not. If the on-counter value is still not 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and checks the main power interruption detection switch input port again. Then, when the loop from step S134 to step S132 is repeated and the check condition is satisfied (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72, in addition to the output ports corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the second big prize opening solenoid 97, as described above, also controls the test signal terminal and the command control signal. Clear the corresponding output port buffer.

Steps S138, S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When sum calculation is completed for all areas (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the validity value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: In addition, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibited area and stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for the shutdown of the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70). held without. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be added to the sum) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 7).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds) based on an interrupt request signal from the counter/timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the registers (each pair of the accumulator A and the flag register F, and the general-purpose registers B to L) used during the execution of the main loop to the saving area of the RAM76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after saving the values during the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes lottery random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and looped within a prescribed range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process here. The contents of the processing are the same as those described above (step S120 in FIG. 8).

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input/output (I/O) port 79 . Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the right starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening The input state (ON/OFF) of the winning detection signal from the switch 86 is read.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this processing, among the switch signals input in the previous input processing, the game is being played based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, and the right starting winning opening switch 83. events that have occurred are determined, and further processing is executed according to each event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the upper starting winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82 or the right starting winning opening switch 83, the main control CPU 72 controls the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that serves as a trigger for an internal lottery (lottery trigger) corresponding to the special symbol has occurred. Also, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When determining that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each occurrence event. Processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the upper starting winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82 or the right starting winning opening switch 83 will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S204a: The main control CPU 72 executes setting change processing (setting related processing). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 performs setting-related processing including at least one of setting change processing executed when changing the setting value and setting confirmation processing executed when confirming the setting value. can be executed (setting-related processing executing means). It should be noted that when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is not performed (when the normal game state is set), it is possible not to execute this process. Further, in the normal game state, a process of calculating the base and displaying the calculated base on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU 72 determines the number of winning balls paid out by entering each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, big winning opening) as an out number indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch) (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means).

Step S205, step S206a, step S206b: The main control CPU72 executes the normal symbol game process, the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 . Among these, in the normal symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. to control. For example, the main control CPU72 stores the random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired with the passage of the starting gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and in this normal symbol game process A random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery executing means). When the random number falls within the winning range, the normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. Energize to operate the variable starting winning device 28 . On the other hand, if the random number is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs stop display of normal symbols in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

In addition, in the first special symbol game process (step S206a), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol (first lottery executing means), and the fluctuation by the first special symbol display device 34 It controls display and stop display, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. In addition, in the second special symbol game process (step S206b), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (second lottery execution means), the variation by the second special symbol display device 35 It controls display and stop display, and controls the operation of the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. The details of the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signal input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92. Outputs a prize ball instruction command. The payout control device 92 (payout device), during execution of a big win game (special game) or a small win game (special game), when a game ball enters the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, Game balls corresponding to a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

Also, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize content command. Also, when a winning detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 86 corresponding to the normal winning opening 22, a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (10 game balls) is generated. The prize content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

[Regarding the number of prize balls and the number of winning game balls]
The number of prize balls for the start opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls for the start opening of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of prize balls is calculated based on the probability of winning the special symbol lottery and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (average number of balls obtained during a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). May be set. Furthermore, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the opening time of the large winning opening, the maximum winning number of the large winning opening, and the number of prize balls in the large winning opening are predetermined. If the condition of (1) is satisfied, a big win may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one big win is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-described external information signals (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, number of symbol determination times information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in the port output request buffer. The external information signal stored in the port output request buffer is transmitted to the data display device and the hall computer via the external terminal board 160. FIG.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5" are output as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing the jackpot information into a plurality of "jackpots 1" to "jackpots 5" and outputting them, the types of jackpots (types of winnings) can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations. Occurrence of small hits that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the shortened state of symbol fluctuation time (hit that does not operate the conditional device) even if it is not winning. can be aggregated and managed. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently jackpotting. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current symbol variation time is shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the respective output states (set of ON or OFF) of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5".

Step S209: The main control CPU 72 also executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, variation time reduction function in operation). and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70, for example.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. It controls lighting states of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the previous normal symbol game process (step S205), the first special symbol game process (step S206a), and the second special symbol game process (step S206b) port output. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a stop display, a working memory number display, a game state display, etc.).

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 also executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 combines the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90 and the second big prize opening solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer, and outputs them to the port. Output.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 in the command buffer to check whether there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command necessary for effect control), if there is an unsent command command to be output port output.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in this CTC interrupt.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing of steps S205 to S212 (game control program module) is executed as a timer interrupt processing, but these processing are executed by incorporating them into the main loop of the CPU. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) designating the end of the interrupt in the interrupt program counter and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215, S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the values of the saved registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 10). Each procedure will be described below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 and executes normal symbol memory update processing. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, acquires a random number per normal symbol. do. Also, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the obtained random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . On the other hand, if the passage detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

Step S12: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the upper starting winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the upper starting winning opening 26 (a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the lower starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 28b (a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S15 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S16.

Step S16: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the right starting winning opening switch 83 corresponding to the right starting winning opening 27 (a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S17 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning port of the first variable winning device 30 . When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big winning game. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S<b>20 : The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning port of the second variable winning device 31 . When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big win game. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 10).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory updating process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot decision random numbers and jackpot pattern random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections for the first special symbol and four sections for the second special symbol (for example, 2 bytes each). The jackpot pattern random numbers can be stored in sets (sets) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored, for example, in the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). A random number is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75 . When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed in two batches of 1 byte each for the upper and lower bytes. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. Acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot design random number from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot design random number corresponding to the first special design at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by designating the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the specified address, it saves them to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section of the area. (storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, 1st to 4th) is set for a plurality of sections, and if all the 1st to 4th sections are empty at the present stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that reading from the random number storage area is in FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. If it is other than during a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the performance based on the prediction is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition regarding the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the content of the effect is determined accordingly. It is for judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (for example, "B8H") with respect to the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination production for the first special symbol". In addition, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a one word length command will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, a one-word-length command is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command. Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the low-order byte is set to "0" by default to indicate that the value is "a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the current working memory number is "01H" as a result of incrementing by one from the previous working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is ``02H'' to ``04H'', it means that the number of working memories ``01H'' to ``03H'' up to the previous time has increased by 1, resulting in the number of working memories ``02H'' to ``02H'' to `` 04H”. In addition, the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the starting entrance winning sound control command. (means for notifying the number of memories).

If the above procedure is completed, or if the number of first special symbol working memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory updating process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and checks whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working memory number counter also indicates the number (number of sets) of the jackpot decision random numbers and jackpot pattern random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 12), based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10). will be

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random number is the same as in step S32 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. The method of obtaining the random value is the same as in step S33 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S44: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 (variation pattern determining element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, reach determination random numbers, and variation pattern determination random numbers to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section of the area. stored as a set in (storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. Then, if it is other than during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that, likewise, an effect based on prediction is not performed for a ball entering during a big hit.

Step S46: If it is other than during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the second special symbol jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect contents are determined accordingly. It is for judging. The specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S47: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (for example, "B9H"). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly here, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, one word A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length effect command is obtained by adding the increased working memory number (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. to generate Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the low-order byte to "0" by default, it is possible to express that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made to transmit a special figure destination determination production command, a production command at the time of increasing the number of working memories, a starting entrance winning sound control command, etc. to the production control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol (means for notifying the number of memories). . Also, after completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11).

[Production determination process when acquired]
FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition time effect determination process (first determination means of execution). As described above, this process includes the first special symbol (at the time of entering the upper start winning port 26 or the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port 28b)), the second special symbol (at the time of entering the right start winning port 27). At the time of entering the ball) is executed for each. Therefore, the following description may correspond to the processing related to the first special symbol or the processing related to the second special symbol. The contents of the processing will be described below along each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of failure).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the big hit determination random number as the first judgment random number. The random number loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit value) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number from this comparison value. Incidentally, the comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes fluctuation pattern information pre-determination processing at the time of deviation (fluctuation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above regarding the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior judgment information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) particularly when the "variation time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is the time of operation of the "variation time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the variation time corresponds to the "missing reach variation (non-reduced variation time)" Determine whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-shortened fluctuation time". In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation, it is also possible to determine "reach group (type of reach)" from the reach mode random number and generate a fluctuation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "variation time reduction function" is not in operation, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the variation time corresponds to the "usual reach variation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. to judge whether As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "usual deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of loss described above.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, when there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot pattern random numbers paired with it correspond to "probability variable patterns (9 round probability variable patterns, 16 round probability variable patterns)". If so, the probability state schedule flag is set to, for example, "A0H". This value represents a flag value for setting a high-probability state in advance determination (prefetch determination) of the jackpot determination random number obtained after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and if the jackpot pattern random numbers paired with it correspond to "non-variable (normal) patterns", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state at the time of preliminary determination (prefetch determination) of the jackpot determination random number obtained after the jackpot determination random number. If there is no winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In this example, the "probability state schedule flag" is used to strictly perform preliminary hit determination. Steps S58, S60, S62, S76, etc. may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the comparison value for the low probability (normal time) to the A register. The comparison value for low probability is also defined in advance according to the winning probability of the pachinko machine 1 at low probability.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "current probability state flag". This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state is high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76 . If the current probability state is high probability (during variable probability), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if it is low probability (normal medium), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H ”).

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not indicate a high probability (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability (No ), and then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparative value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The comparison value for high probability is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the pachinko machine 1 at high probability.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and then the next step S72 is performed. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not indicate a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the hit value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the big hit determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register. ), the main control CPU 72 executes the fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process at the time of deviation (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the hit value range but is within the hit value range (No), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This processing is for judging the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot design random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above step S54, and from the result, "normal design (9 rounds normal design)" or "probability variation design (9 rounds probability variation design, 16 rounds probability variation design) as the jackpot type. ” is determined. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents the "normal symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "01H". On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "variable probability symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "A0H". As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that "flag has been set" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination determination value is set to "01H" when it corresponds to the "normal symbol", and is set to "A0H" when it corresponds to the "variable probability symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit time variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding, for example, the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of the big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set according to the previous determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when preliminary hit determination is performed only based on the current probability state as described above, there is no need to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the probability state schedule flag has already been set (Yes), it then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the low-probability (normal) comparison value in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "probability state schedule flag". As described above, the probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in the subsequent pre-determination based on the previous pre-determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the previous judgment result immediately before is scheduled to shift to a high probability (variable probability), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above, and conversely, the immediately preceding judgment result is scheduled to return to low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state scheduled flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded probability state schedule flag does not indicate a high probability schedule (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability schedule ( No), then step S64 is executed to set a high-probability comparison value.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has already been set and the value is for a high probability, the comparative value is rewritten for the high probability and then the next step S72 and subsequent steps is performed. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but indicates a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine a big hit in advance by taking into consideration subsequent changes in the internal state based on the previous determination result (normal probability state→high probability state, high probability state→normal probability state). .

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13).

[Parallel variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol]
Next, the details of the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process will be described. In this embodiment, by separately executing the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol display device 34 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol by the display device 35 can be performed in parallel (symbol parallel variation means). Therefore, in this embodiment, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process are separately performed under the control of the main control CPU 72 (1 per interrupt cycle). times).

[First special symbol game process]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol game process.
First, the first special symbol game process has a procedure (step S1000a) for confirming whether or not the internal state flag is "big win start (during big win game)".

Step S1000a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game state (internal state) corresponding to the second special symbol is "big win start (during big win game)". This confirmation can be made based on the progress of the processing performed so far regarding the second special symbol (the value of the second special symbol game management status). The reason why this confirmation is performed in the present embodiment is that the game relating to the first special symbol is not allowed to progress when the other second special symbol is in the midst of a jackpot game.

At this time, if the second special symbol is not in the middle of a big hit game (the second special symbol game management status is a value of a big hit) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the processing of the next step S1000b.

In addition, the first special symbol game process includes a procedure (step S1000b) for confirming whether or not the fluctuation time measurement temporary stop flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON, and the game state is a small hit. have. If the variable time measurement paused flag is ON, it means that the variable time measurement is being paused, and if the variable time measurement paused flag is OFF, the variable time measurement is stopped It means that you are not in pause.

Step S1000b: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time measurement temporary stop flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and the game state is a small hit. In the present embodiment, this confirmation is performed by temporarily measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when a small winning game is being played with respect to the other second special symbol and the first symbol is fluctuating. This is because we are planning to stop it.

At this time, if the variable time measurement suspended flag is not ON, or even if the variable time measurement suspended flag is ON, the game state is not a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step The processing after S1000b1 is executed. Steps S1000b1 to S6000 are program modules that form the basis of the first special symbol game processing. The main control CPU72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the first special symbol through the processing of step S1000b1 to step S6000 which are the basis of these.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time measurement paused flag is ON and the small hit game is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S7000.

The core part of the first special symbol game processing includes special game special symbol discrimination flag update processing (step S1000b1), execution selection processing (step S1000c), special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol variation during processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), variable winning device management processing for big hit (step S5000), variable winning device management processing for small win (step S6000) subroutines (program modules) groups are included. . First, the basic flow of the first special symbol game process will be described along with each process.

Step S1000b1: The main control CPU 72 executes a special game special symbol discrimination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of determining which of the first special symbols and the second special symbols is the target symbol to be processed. Here, the special game special symbol discrimination flag is a flag that specifies the symbol to be processed, and is stored in the RAM76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, "0") corresponding to the first special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol discrimination flag.

Step S1000c: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S6000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the first special symbol game process to the stack pointer as the address of the return destination.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (first special symbol game management status). For example, if the first special symbol has not yet started variable display (first special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. select. Also, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (first special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol If the processing during fluctuation is completed (first special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU selects which process to execute next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and at the beginning step, it refers to the flags one by one and performs conditional branching (continuation/return). There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU72 performs the work of preparing the conditions for starting the variation display of the first special symbol. Specifically, big hit determination (first lottery executing means) and variation pattern determination are performed here, and in the case of a big hit, determination of winning type is also performed. In addition, along with the determination of the winning type, the main control CPU 72 sets the number-of-time counters for the "time reduction state" and the "high probability state". The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1-byte data) is output to each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby performing the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, in this process, a determination process of whether or not to operate the skip function is also performed, and in the previous big hit determination, for example, the first special symbol is in the process of changing the big hit, and the second special symbol is not elected. If so, the skip function is activated for the second special symbol. By the operation of this skip function, the process of forcibly ending the non-winning variation of the second special symbol is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device . Similarly here, ON or OFF drive signals are output to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, thereby performing the stop display of the first special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the big win in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the first special symbol is stop-displayed in the form of a 9-round normal jackpot, a 9-round probability variable jackpot, or a 16-round probability variable jackpot, the previous normal state changes to a jackpot game state (a special game state advantageous to the player). An opportunity to migrate occurs. During the big hit game with respect to the first special symbol, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is continuously operated for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine winnings are counted). (For example, 9 times), the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are focused on the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collectively win many prize balls (special game execution means, open game execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit is called "round", and if the number of consecutive operations is nine times in total, it is called "nine rounds". Collectively. In this embodiment, as types of jackpots, not only the 9-round normal jackpot and the 9-round variable probability jackpot, but also a plurality of types of 16-round variable probability jackpots are provided.

When the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the first variable winning device 30 or the first variable winning device 30 for one round 2 The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening/closing operation of the variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big role) with respect to the first special symbol only for that round.

Then, when the jackpot game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortening state) after the jackpot game is finished based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, variation time reduction function operation flag). (high-probability state transition means, time-reduction state transition means, low-probability time-reduction state transition means, high-probability non-time-reduction state transition means). In the "high-probability state", the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is, for example, ten times higher than normal. In addition, in the "time shortening state", the variable time shortening function operates, the probability of the operation lottery of the normal pattern becomes high, the variable time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended and opened. The number of times increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). Regarding the "high-probability state" and the "shortened-time state", the control may shift to only one of them, or may shift to both of them.

In this embodiment, the "time shortening state" means that the variation time shortening function is activated, the variation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is shortened, the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high, variable It means a state in which the opening time of the starting prize winning device 28 is extended (open extension function operation).

In addition, the "non-shortening state" means that the fluctuation time reduction function is deactivated, the fluctuation time of normal symbols or special symbols is not shortened, and the probability of winning the normal symbol operation lottery becomes low. It means a state in which the opening time of the variable starting prize winning device 28 is not extended (open extension function inactive).

Step S6000: Small hit time variable winning device management process is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a small-hit mode, an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to a small-hit game state. During the small-hit game, the jump destination is set to the small-hit time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small winning game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (eg, once) in a predetermined opening time (eg, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can put out a certain amount of balls during the small winning game. can be obtained. In addition, in this embodiment, since a small hit is not set for the first special symbol, this process is not executed, but if a small hit is set for the first special symbol, this process is executed.

Step S7000: The process of temporarily stopping the measurement of the fluctuation time is a process of maintaining the fluctuation of the first special symbol without stopping it. The main control CPU 72 drives and controls the first special symbol display device 34 when the second special symbol is in the midst of a small winning game and the first special symbol is fluctuating. As the drive control of the first special symbol display device 34, a process of outputting an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) to each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7 segment LED is executed, This maintains the state in which the first special symbol is not stopped. In addition, when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted after the small hit game is finished. Even if the main control CPU 72 determines that the second special symbol is in the midst of a small winning game, if the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the main control CPU 72 does not execute the fluctuation time measurement temporary stop process. Also, measurement of the fluctuation time may be forced termination instead of suspension.

[Second special symbol game processing]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol game process.
The second special symbol game process first has a procedure (step S1900a) for confirming whether or not the other first special symbol is in the midst of a big hit.

Step S1900a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game state corresponding to the first special symbol is "during jackpot game". This confirmation can also be performed based on the value of the first special symbol game management status as described above. It should be noted that the reason why this determination excludes the determination of whether or not the game is "during a small winning game" is that there is no small winning in the first special symbol.

At this time, if the first special symbol is not in a big hit game (the value of the first special symbol game management status is a big hit) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the processing after the next step S1900a1. Steps S1900a1 to S6900 are program modules that form the core of the second special symbol game processing. The main control CPU72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the second special symbol through the processing of step S1900a1 to step S6900 which are the basis of these.

As explained in the previous first special symbol game process, also for the core part of the second special symbol game process, special game special symbol discrimination flag update process (step S1900a1), execution selection process (step S1900b), special symbol variation Pre-processing (step S2900), processing during special symbol fluctuation (step S3900), processing during special symbol stop display (step S4900), variable winning device management processing at the time of big hit (step S5900), variable winning device management processing at the time of small hit (step S6900) subroutine (program module) group is included. In addition, description of the same content as the first special symbol game process is omitted as appropriate.

Step S1900a1: The main control CPU 72 executes a special game special symbol discrimination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of determining which of the first special symbols and the second special symbols is the target symbol to be processed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, "1") corresponding to the second special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol determination flag.

Step S1900b: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2900 to S6900) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the second special symbol game process to the stack pointer as the address of the return destination.

Here as well, which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (second special symbol game management status). For example, if the second special symbol has not yet started variable display (second special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) as the next jump destination. select. Also, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (second special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3900) as the next jump destination, and special symbols If the processing during fluctuation is completed (second special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4900) is selected as the next jump destination.

Step S2900: In the special symbol variation preprocessing in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU72 performs the work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the second special symbol (second lottery executing means).

Step S3900: In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer.

Step S4900: In the special symbol stop display process in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the second special symbol display device 35. Also here, similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, thereby performing the stop display of the second special symbol.

Step S5900: The variable winning device management process at the time of big hit is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit in the previous special symbol stop display process. Here, similarly, the stop display mode of the second special symbol is determined in accordance with the winning type. In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the second variable winning device for one round. The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening/closing operation of No. 31 is completed. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big role) with respect to the second special symbol only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is ended with respect to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game ends based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, variation time reduction function operation flag).

Step S6900: Small hit variable winning device management process is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit in the previous special symbol stop display process (special game executing means). For example, when the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a small-hit mode, an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to a small-hit game state. During the small-hit game, the jump destination is set to the small-hit time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small winning game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (eg, once to multiple times) in a predetermined opening time (eg, 0.1 to 1.8 seconds), so that the player is playing a small winning game. , there is a possibility that it will be possible to obtain a certain amount of balls.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, as a plurality of winning types, (1) "Normal 9-round big win", (2) "9-round definite variable big win", and (3) "16-round definite variable big win" are provided. It should be noted that jackpots other than 16 rounds and 9 rounds may be set.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stop-displayed at the time of winning. For example, "16 round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to "16 round probability variation pattern" jackpot, "9 round normal jackpot" corresponds to "9 round normal pattern" jackpot, and "9 round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to "9 rounds Corresponds to the big hit of "Probable variation pattern". For this reason, hereinafter, the "winning type" is appropriately referred to as "winning design".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to each winning pattern will be explained.

[Normal design for 9 rounds]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "9 round normal symbol", an opportunity to shift from the previous normal state to the jackpot game state is generated (special game execution means, open game means of execution). In this case, the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time is 29.0 seconds) from the first round. Continue until the second round. Therefore, the jackpot game of "Nine round normal symbols" provides the player with 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

In addition, when it corresponds to the ``9 round normal pattern'', even if the ``variation time reduction function'' has been inactive in the game up to that point, the ``variation time reduction function'' can be activated after the end of the big win game. to move to the "time reduction state".

It should be noted that the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur within one round. be done. In addition, the second big prize winning port 31b of the second variable prize winning device 31 similarly does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of prize winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur within one round. closed to

[9 round probability variation pattern]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "9 round probability variable symbol", an opportunity to shift from the normal state to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means, open game means of execution). In this case, the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once for a sufficiently long time (for example, the maximum opening time is 29.0 seconds) from the first round. Continue until the second round. Therefore, the jackpot game of "9 round probability variable pattern" provides the player with 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

In addition, when it corresponds to the "9 round probability variable pattern", the "probability variation function" is operated after the jackpot game ends, and the state shifts to the "high probability state".

[16 round probability variation pattern]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "16 round probability variable symbol", an opportunity to shift from the previous normal state to the big hit game state is generated (special game execution means, open game means of execution). In this case, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 takes a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round. Continue until the second round. Therefore, the jackpot game of "16 round probability variable pattern" provides the player with 16 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

In addition, when it corresponds to the "16 round probability variable pattern", the "probability variation function" is operated after the jackpot game ends, and the state shifts to the "high probability state".

As described above, when the winning pattern corresponds to the above-mentioned "9 round normal pattern", after the jackpot game ends, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate, and the "variation time reduction function" operates, so the internal state is Transition to "low probability time reduction state".

Also, if the winning pattern corresponds to the above "9 round probability variable pattern" or "16 round probability variable pattern", after the jackpot game ends, the "probability fluctuation function" operates, and the "variation time reduction function" does not operate. The internal state shifts to "high probability non-time reduction state".

Further, in the operation patterns shown in this table, the inter-round interval time is commonly "1.5 seconds". The inter-round interval time is a waiting time set between rounds.

[small hit]
In addition, in this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than non-winning for the second special symbol. When a small win is won, a small win game is performed separately from the big win game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game executing means). That is, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing, a small winning game (a game in which the second variable winning device 31 operates) is executed. A jackpot win is a specific win.

Here, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but a small hit may be set for the first special symbol. However, in that case, in order to increase the incidence of small hits in the second special pattern lottery, the probability of hitting a small hit (special winning type) in the first special pattern lottery is higher in the second special pattern lottery It is preferable to define a high probability of hitting a small hit. In the small winning game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (eg, once) in a predetermined opening time (eg, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can put out a certain amount of balls during the small winning game. can be obtained.

In addition, even if the small winning game ends, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate, and the "variation time reduction function" does not operate, so the "high probability state" and "time reduction state" do not operate. No privilege to transition to (not a precondition for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small win game is over, and even if you win a small win in the "shortened time state", The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit number of times is reached).

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the second variable prize winning device 31 at the time of a small win is not limited to one type, and a plurality of small winning symbols are set, such as a double open pattern, a triple open pattern, a 12 open pattern, and the like. A plurality of opening patterns may be set as described above. However, the small winning game ends within the first time (for example, 5 seconds) regardless of which opening pattern is set.

[Special symbol change preprocessing]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. In addition, the contents of the special symbol variation preprocessing described below can be common in the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) and the second special symbol game process (FIG. 16). However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game process, the control object is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game process, the control object is the second special symbol. do. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2090: First, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether or not the fluctuation time measurement temporary stop flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON.

When determining that the fluctuation time measurement suspension flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2092.

Step S2092: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol reading processing. In this process, the information of the stop symbol saved in the RAM 76 is read. Then, based on the read stop symbol information, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the first special symbol display device 34 . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when lost) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2094: The main control CPU 72 executes remaining variation time reading processing. In this process, the variable timer value (value of the remaining variable time) saved in the RAM 76 is read. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the read variable timer to the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of loss to the stop symbol display timer.

Step S2096: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol re-variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU72 sets the special symbol re-variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a re-variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . This re-fluctuation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2098: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to turn off the fluctuation time measurement temporary stop flag stored in the RAM 76 . As a result, the situation in which the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended is cancelled.
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) to the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the variable time measurement paused flag is ON in the preceding step S2090 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2100.

Step S2100: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special symbol working memory number (first special symbol working memory number or second special symbol working memory number) to be controlled remains (greater than 0). do. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76 . If the number of working memories of the target symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2150.

Step S2150: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol working memory number is zero. That is, if the object to be controlled is the first special symbol, it is checked whether or not the second special symbol working memory number is 0, and if the object to be controlled is the second special symbol, the first special symbol working memory. Check if the number is zero. This confirmation can also be performed by referring to the value of the special symbol working memory number counter. Then, when the other special symbol working memory number is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether there has been no winning for a predetermined period of time in any of the start winning openings, and if it has confirmed that there has been no winning for a predetermined period of time, it generates a command for demonstration effects. . The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU72 returns to the first special symbol game process (Fig. 15) or the second special symbol game process (Fig. 16). In addition, when returning, it returns to the end address of each special symbol game process (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the other special symbol working memory number is not 0 (step S2150: No), the main control CPU72 performs the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol game without executing the demonstration setting process. Return to the process (FIG. 16).

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol working memory number counter to be controlled is greater than 0 (step S2100: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S2160.

Step S2160: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set to the big hit flag or the small hit flag for the other special symbol. The big win flag or small win flag is a flag that is set when the internal lottery results in a big win or a small win, and is reset at the end of the big win game. Therefore, confirmation in this process is confirmation of whether or not the result of the internal lottery for the other special symbol is winning a big win or a small win. In addition, when the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the result of confirmation is inevitably No because the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set. Also, here, the content of determination is "big win or small win", but only "big win" or only "small win" may be made.

In this process, if the value (01H) is set to the big hit flag or small hit flag related to the other special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2202. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is not set to the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol, that is, if the value is "00H" (No), the main control CPU 72 next step S2200 to run.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads the lottery random numbers (big hit decision random numbers, big hit pattern random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the special pattern to be controlled. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the top section, and then shifts (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is saved, for example, in another temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. Also, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be controlled) stored in the RAM76, and the value after the subtraction is set as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, the display mode of the stored number changes (decrease by 1) for the one to be controlled among the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a in the above display output management process. . After completing the procedure up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes big hit determination processing (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number value (jackpot determination random number value) is included in this range (first lottery executing means, second lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). be. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets "01H" to the jackpot flag.

Step S2302: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit determination processing (internal lottery).
If the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery executing means). The "minor win" referred to here is anything other than non-winning (lose), but has a different nature from the "big win". In other words, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (game turning point) to shift to the "high probability state" or "time reduction state", but the "minor win" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "minor win" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the second variable winning device 31, like the "big win". If the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag to "01H". In addition, the odds of winning the small win in the second special symbol lottery may be "approximately 1/1", and as long as it does not correspond to the big win, it may correspond to the small win in the second special symbol lottery. The probability may be "about 1/2 to 1/4", and if it does not correspond to a big hit, it may correspond to a small hit or a loss.

In addition, in this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance on the program as the hit range other than non-winning (regulating means other than non-winning). A small hit determination table may be written in the ROM 74, and the big hit determination may be performed while reading this table and comparing it with a random number value.

Step S2202: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol storage area shift processing. In this process, the same process as the previous step S2200 is performed, so the description is omitted. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination process ends (step S2302), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2400.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the big hit flag has been set to the value (01H) in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set to the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S2402 next, and if the value (01H) is set to the jackpot flag (Yes), the main control CPU72 is next , step S2410 is executed.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous small hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (for example, set 0AH) by the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing when losing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when lost) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

In addition, in this embodiment, since 7-segment LEDs are used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of loss is always one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) with only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of deviation. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of loss for the special symbols to be controlled (variation pattern determination means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol to be controlled, or corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Variation patterns include various variation patterns such as non-reach variation, reach variation, super reach variation, etc. (same applies to big wins and small wins). In addition, the information about the variation pattern of the selected special design is transmitted to the production control device as a variation pattern command.

Here, the fluctuation time at the time of loss varies depending on whether it is the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", so in this process the main control CPU72 loads the game state flag, Check whether the state of is "high probability state" or "time reduction state". For example, in the "shortened time state", the fluctuation time at the time of deviation is set to a shortened time (for example, about 4 to 12 seconds).

Also, even if it is not in the "time shortening state", except when performing reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time at the time of loss is based on the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, for example. It may be shortened. However, when a special variation pattern is selected, the variation time does not change depending on the number of memories. The stop display time of the symbol at the time of loss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time (at the time of loss) to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time at the time of loss to the stop symbol display timer.

In this embodiment, as a result of the internal lottery with the first special symbol, when it corresponds to non-winning, for example, "reach effect" is generated on the production and it is lost, or it is lost without generating "reach effect". It is supposed to control to do. Then, in the "variation pattern selection table at the time of losing", a plurality of types of effects are defined in advance, for example, "non-reach effect", "reach effect" corresponding to the variation pattern is defined. One of the variation patterns is selected from among them. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table when first special symbol is lost]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table when the first special symbol is lost (low probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when losing in the low-probability non-time-reduction state in the first special symbol lottery (in the case of non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "1" to "8" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to variation patterns that are lost without performing reach production, and variation pattern numbers "6" to "8" correspond to variation patterns that are lost after reach. Yes. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents according to the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than double that.

Then, the main control CPU72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the comparison value Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "2" as the corresponding variation pattern number. In addition, in this embodiment, since non-winning is not set for the second special symbol, there is no change pattern selection table for the second special symbol at the time of losing. It is possible to prepare a change pattern selection table at the time of loss related to special symbols.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low-probability time reduction state) when the first special symbol is lost.
This selection table is a table used when losing in the low-probability time-shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (in the case of non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "21" to "28" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "21" to "25" correspond to variation patterns that will be lost without performing reach production, and variation pattern numbers "26" to "28" are variation patterns that will be lost after reach. Yes.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "22" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table when the first special symbol is lost (high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when the first special symbol is lost in the high-probability non-time-reduction state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "41" to "48" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "41" to "48" correspond to variation patterns in which the ready-to-win effect is not performed and the player loses.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "42" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Variation pattern selection table when second special symbol is lost (low probability non-time reduction / low probability time reduction state)]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a variation pattern selection table when the second special symbol is lost (low-probability non-time shortening/low-probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used in the second special symbol lottery at the time of loss in the low-probability non-time-reduction or low-probability time-reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means).
In this table, all the same variation patterns (variation time is specified time (for example, several seconds to several hours)) are set, and in this selection table, one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach deviation variation It has a table structure for selecting the pattern 51) (fluctuation time regulation means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "51" as the variation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired variation pattern determination random number value is.

[Variation pattern selection table when second special symbol is lost (high probability non-time reduction state)]
FIG. 23 is a variation pattern selection table when the second special symbol is lost (high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when the second special symbol is lost in the high-probability non-time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means).
In this table, all the same variation pattern (variation time is about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach small hit variation pattern 52) are selected.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "52" as the variation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired variation pattern determination random number value is.

[See Figure 18: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is lost (in the case of non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes), The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedures. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big-hit stop symbol selection table in the big-hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol based on the big-hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of the big hit]
In this embodiment, there are roughly three types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the three types is "9 round normal pattern", "9 round probability variation pattern" and "16 round probability variation pattern". Each of the winning symbols of the three types may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "9 round normal pattern", "9 round normal pattern a", "9 round normal pattern b", "9 round normal pattern c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of winning symbols selected at the time of a big hit in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big win corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to this first special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means) to determine the kind of winning symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the allocation values for each winning symbol, and each allocation value "35", "55", and "10" has a denominator of 100. It corresponds to the proportion of cases. In addition, the second column from the left shows “9 round normal symbols”, “9 round probability variable symbols”, and “16 round probability variable symbols” corresponding to each distribution value. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "9 round normal symbol" is 35/100 (=35%), and the ratio of selecting "9 round probability variable symbol" is 100 minutes. 55 (=55%), and the percentage of "16 round probability variation pattern" is selected is 10/100 (=10%). The magnitude of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. to selectively determine winning patterns. In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. The stop symbol command is described, for example, as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B1H" indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol was a big hit. represents. The EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" in the lower bytes respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, and "9 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol jackpot, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time saving number of times]
The second column from the right of the first special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table shows the value of the number of time reductions (number of times of time reduction) given after the end of the jackpot game.
In this embodiment, 100 times is set as the number of times of time saving when it corresponds to the "9 round normal pattern". On the other hand, when it corresponds to "9 round probability variation pattern" or "16 round probability variation pattern", 0 times is set as the number of times of time saving (the number of times of time saving is not set).

[Probable number of times]
The right column of the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol big hit shows the value of the number of probability variations (the number of probability variations, the number of ST) given after the end of the big hit game.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "9 rounds normal pattern", 0 times is set as the probability variation frequency (the probability variation frequency is not set). On the other hand, when it corresponds to "9 round probability variation pattern" or "16 round probability variation pattern", 10000 times are set as probability variation frequency.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the second special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72, when the result of this big win corresponds to the second special symbol, determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol big win stopping symbol selection table (winning kind defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows distribution values for each winning symbol. Equivalent to the ratio when Similarly, the second column from the left shows "9-round normal symbols", "9-round probability variable symbols", and "16-round probability variable symbols" corresponding to the allocation values. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the second special design, the ratio of selecting "9 round normal design" is 35/100 (=35%), and the ratio of selecting "9 round probability variation design" is It is 5/100 (=5%), and the ratio of "16 round probability variation pattern" to be selected is 60/100 (=60%).

When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. to decide Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" is selected when the winning symbol of this time hits the second special symbol. It means that The EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" in the lower bytes respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and "16 round probability variable symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as "B2H03H". .

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the above effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol. It should be noted that the main control CPU 72 also generates a stop symbol command at the time of the small hit as well as at the time of the big hit.

[Time saving number of times and probability variable number of times]
The values of the number of times of reduction in time and the number of probability variations in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table are the same as the values of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.

[See Figure 18: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time than when losing is determined.

In this embodiment, when a 9-round normal jackpot, a 9-round probability variable jackpot, or a 16-round probability variable jackpot is obtained as a result of an internal lottery, control is performed to generate, for example, a "ready-to-win performance" in the performance to make a big win. Then, in the "variation pattern selection table at the time of the big hit", the variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of "reach effects" are defined, and if it corresponds to the 9 round normal jackpot, the 9 round probability variable big hit, or the 16 round probability variable big hit, , one of the fluctuation patterns is selected. Also, at the time of winning while the variable time reduction function is operating, instead of selecting a variable pattern with a long variable time, select a variable pattern with a short variable time (a variable pattern that does not perform a ready-to-win effect). good too.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time reduction state) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot.
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low-probability non-time reduction state in the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation pattern defining means). In this embodiment, variation patterns are not distinguished between the 9-round normal jackpot, the 9-round probability variable jackpot, and the 16-round probability variable jackpot. ). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to variation patterns in which a ready-to-win effect is performed and hits.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "62" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot timing variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low-probability non-time reduction state in the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "71" to "78" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "71" to "78" all correspond to variation patterns in which the ready-to-win effect is not performed and the player wins.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "72" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot (low-probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortening state in the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". 'Variation pattern number''81' to '88' are assigned to each 'comparison value'.

Variation pattern numbers "81" to "88" all correspond to variation patterns in which a ready-to-win effect is performed and hits.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "82" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot timing variation pattern selection table (low-probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortening state in the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "91" to "98" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "91" to "98" all correspond to variation patterns in which the ready-to-win effect is not performed and the player wins.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "92" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high-probability non-time reduction state) at the time of the first special symbol jackpot.
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high-probability non-time reduction state in the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation pattern defining means).
In this table, all the same variation patterns (variation time is about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) are set, and in this selection table, one predetermined variation pattern (variation pattern per non-reach 101 ) is configured as a table.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "101" as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot timing variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability non-time reduction state in the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation pattern defining means).
In this table, the same variation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined variation pattern (variation pattern per non-reach 102 ) is configured as a table.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "102" as the variation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired variation pattern determination random number value is.

[See Figure 18: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of the big hit.
In this process, if the winning symbol type (jackpot stop symbol number) determined in step S2410 is "9 round probability variable symbol" or "16 round probability variable symbol", the main control CPU72 stores in the flag area of RAM76. A value (01H) is set in the probability variation function activation flag as the stored game state flag (high probability state transition means, probability variation function activation means, advantageous game state transition means).

Also, in this process, if the winning symbol type (jackpot stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is "9-round normal symbol", the main control CPU72 determines the game state stored in the flag area of the RAM76. A value (01H) is set to a fluctuation time reduction function activation flag as a flag (time reduction state transition means, fluctuation time reduction function activation means).

Also, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win (stop symbol number at the time of the small win) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of the small win (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random number is used to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72 to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Election design at the time of small hit]
The winning pattern at the time of the small hit may be only one type of "1 time open small winning pattern", and other than this, for example, other types such as "2 times open small winning pattern" and "3 times open small winning pattern" You may prepare. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2 It is possible to provide a “one-time open small winning pattern” without being bound by the regulation of “more than once open)”.

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, it is possible to select a reach variation pattern in the case of a small hit, or to select a variation pattern equivalent to that in normal variation.

[Variation pattern selection table for second special symbol small hit (low probability non-time reduction/low probability time reduction state)]
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time shortening/low-probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit in a low-probability non-time-reduction state or a low-probability time-reduction state in the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation pattern defining means).
In this table, all the same fluctuation patterns (variation time is specified time (for example, several minutes to several hours)) are set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small It has a table configuration for selecting the hit variation pattern 201 (variation time regulation means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "201" as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random number value.

[Variation pattern selection table at the time of second special symbol small hit (high probability non-time reduction state)]
FIG. 33 is a second special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit with the second special symbol in a high-probability non-time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means).
In this table, all the same variation pattern (variation time is about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach small hit variation pattern 202) is selected.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "202" as the variation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired variation pattern determination random number value is.

[See Figure 18: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop design (small hit design) by the first special design display device 34 or the second special design display device 35 based on the small hit stop design number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also sent to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (when lost/when hit). In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol fluctuation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 . Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S2416: The main control CPU 72 executes a number cutting counter value management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the value of the cut counter value. Details of the processing will be described later. Further, such processing may be executed during the special symbol stop display processing.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) to the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figs. 15 and 16: Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
In the special symbol fluctuation process (step S3000 or step S3900), the main control CPU72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer set as described above from the register to the timer counter, and then the elapsed time (clock pulse count number or the value of the interrupt counter). Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to be controlled until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900) to the next jump destination.

Further, in this process, a determination process of whether or not to operate the skip function is also performed, and in the big hit determination or small hit determination of the previous special symbol variation preprocessing, one special symbol is in the process of losing, and When it is determined that the other special symbol corresponds to a big win or a small win, the skip function is activated for one special symbol. Due to the operation of this skip function, the variable display of one of the special symbols is forcibly terminated.

[FIGS. 15 and 16: Processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900), the main control CPU72 is a special symbol based on the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determination process (step S2092, step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 18) to control the stop display of the . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol fluctuation flag.

Here, the conditions for executing the big hit determination process (step S2300) and the small hit determination process (step S2302) will be briefly described.

[Internal lottery table]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an internal lottery correspondence table.
In the internal lottery correspondence table, when the corresponding special symbol executes the internal lottery jackpot lottery (big hit determination process) or small hit lottery (small hit determination process), based on the state of the other special symbol It is shown that it is determined whether or not to

When the other special symbol is "during big win fluctuation (during fluctuation display when the big win flag is 01H)", the big win lottery and the small win lottery are not executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery for the special symbol corresponds to "lost".

Similarly, when the other special symbol is "during small hit fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)", in the internal lottery of the special design, the big hit lottery and the small lottery Not executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery for the special symbol corresponds to "lost". In addition, when it is "during fluctuation of the small hit (during display of fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)", a method of executing a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery may be adopted.

On the other hand, when the other special symbol is "during fluctuation (during fluctuation display when the big win flag or small win flag is 00H)", in the internal lottery of the special symbol, the big win lottery is first executed, Then, if it does not correspond to a big hit, a small prize lottery is executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery for the special symbol corresponds to either "big win", "minor win" or "lose". It should be noted that during the deviation fluctuation, waiting for fluctuation and stop display are included.

Thus, when one of the special symbols is "during the big hit fluctuation" or "during the small hit fluctuation", the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the other special pattern, and as a result, the big hit game or A small winning game is not executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is "during big hit fluctuation" or "during small hit fluctuation", the other special symbol is substantially in a non-lottery state of a big hit or a small hit.

[Number of cutting counter value management processing]
FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the number-of-times counter value management process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S2420: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the number cutting counter value. In the "high-probability state" and the "short-time state," each counter value is set in the variable-probability count area and the short-time count area of the RAM 76, respectively. In this embodiment, when transitioning to the "high probability non-time reduction state", the number cutting counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times), but the number cutting counter for the time reduction state is not set. . Further, when shifting to the "low-probability time reduction state", the number-of-times cutting counter for the high-probability state is not set, and the number-of-times cutting counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (eg, 100 times).

Step S2422: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number of cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number of times counter value is not 0 (No), after generating a number of times counter value command (time saving number of times designation command, special number of times designation command, ST number of times designation command, etc.), the main control CPU72 next Step S2424 is executed.

Step S2424: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the number cutting counter value.
Step S2426: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the result of the subtraction is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number cutting counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2428. On the other hand, if the value of the number cutting counter is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 18).

Step S2428: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting the flag when the multiple cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when transitioning to the "high-probability non-time reduction state", the number-of-times counter for the high-probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10000 times). It is only the stochastic variation function activation flag. Also, when transitioning to the "low-probability time reduction state", the number-of-time counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Only active flags.

When the above processing is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 18).

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. The contents of the special symbol storage area shift process can be common to the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process. However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol, the object of control is the first special symbol, and when the procedure is applied to the second special symbol, the object of control is the second special symbol. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2210: First, the main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76 corresponding to the special symbol to be controlled. It should be noted that the specific contents of the processing are as already described in the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2212: Also, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the special symbol to be controlled. For example, if the special symbol to be controlled is the first special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special symbol to be controlled is the second special symbol. If so, the main control CPU72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2214: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the "variation start time working memory number" for the special symbols to be controlled from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction.

Step S2216: In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the special symbol to be controlled. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of one word length, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described "effect command at the time of working memory increase". That is, the working memory number reduction effect command is a value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") representing the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the command type. ”) is added, and an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is added (logical sum) to the value of the lower byte. Therefore, for the lower byte, the addition value "10H" is logically summed, and the second digit becomes "1". become a thing. That is, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memory up to the previous time "4" (the command notation is "14H") has decreased by one, resulting in the number of working memory of this time being "3" (command The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result that the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") has decreased by one. , indicates that the current number of working memories is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). In addition, the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol. If the object to be controlled is the second special symbol, the preceding value becomes a value (for example, "BCH") representing the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2218: The main control CPU 72 then executes effect command output processing. This process is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the production command for the special symbol to be controlled set in the previous step S2216 when the number of working memories decreases (means for notifying the number of memories).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 18).

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process during special symbol fluctuation. Each procedure will be described below. The contents of the special symbol fluctuation process described below can be common in the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) and the second special symbol game process (FIG. 16). That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game process, the control target is the first special symbol, and when applied to the second special symbol game process, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S3100: The main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the variable timer for the special symbols to be controlled (decrements the value corresponding to the interrupt period).

Step S3200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the variable timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the variable timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the variable display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000b in FIG. 15 or step S1900b in FIG. 16) in the next interrupt cycle, and special symbol fluctuation display processing repeatedly.

On the other hand, if the variable timer value is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the variable display time has expired (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S3300.

Step S3300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag for the special symbol to be controlled. If the jackpot flag is set to the value (01H) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S3400. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S3600.

Step S3400: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed. In this confirmation process, with the end of the variation display at the time of the big hit of the target special symbol, whether it is necessary to operate the skip function for the other special symbol (forcibly terminate the loss variation of the other). Executed to see if Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S3500 as it is necessary to operate the skip function for the other special symbol. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (No), the other special symbol is not variably displayed and there is no need to operate the skip function, so the main control CPU 72 next steps Execute S3600.

Step S3500: The main control CPU72 executes the process of activating the skip function for the other special symbol. That is, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for ending the variable display regarding the other special symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets 0 to the value of the variable timer related to the other special symbol.

Step S3600: The main control CPU72 executes special symbol variation end processing. In this process, a value (01H) is set to the symbol stop display flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76 as the variable display of the special symbol to be controlled ends. Also, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900) to the next jump destination. After finishing the above procedure, it returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 16).

Here, the big-hit lottery probability and the small-hit lottery probability of the gaming machine of the present embodiment are set as follows.
For example, the jackpot probability is set to about 1/319 when the game state is the normal state (the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is low). Also, the jackpot probability is set to about 1/100 when the game state is in an advantageous state (high probability of winning the special symbol lottery). Further, the small winning probability is defined according to the type of special symbol regardless of the game state, and since the first special symbol has no small winning probability, there is no small winning probability. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to approximately 1/1.1. For this reason, the second special symbol lottery is set to be more likely to be a small hit than the first special symbol lottery (winning type regulating means).

[Skip function and variable time measurement pause function]
Hereinafter, the skip function to forcibly stop the variation display in the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35, and the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol display device 34 are temporarily stopped. The function will be explained concretely.

FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing changes in the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
Among them, (A) in FIG. 38 shows an example of "skip function and fluctuation time measurement temporary stop function non-operational example". 10 is a timing chart showing changes in each variable display when the skip function and the variable time measurement pause function do not operate when the variable display is started.

In addition, (B) in FIG. 38 shows "an example of operation of the variable time measurement temporary stop function", and during the variable display when the second special symbol is a small hit, the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is lost. 10 is a timing chart showing changes in each variable display when the variable time measurement pause function is activated when .

Further, (C) in FIG. 38 shows a "skip function operation example", and when the first special symbol starts the variable display corresponding to the big hit during the variable display when the second special symbol is lost. , and a timing chart showing changes in each variable display each time the skip function is activated. The skip function and the variable time measurement temporary stop function will be described with reference to these timing charts (A) to (C).

[(A) in FIG. 38: Example of non-operation of each function]
The state of each special symbol at the time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is waiting for variation, and the second special symbol is being displayed in variation at the time of the big hit.

Then, at time t1, with the entry of the game ball into the starting winning hole corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is based on the result of the internal lottery. A variable display is started on the display device 34 . Here, since the second special symbol is being changed and displayed at the time of the big win, the internal lottery for the first special symbol does not carry out the big win lottery and the small win lottery. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery will be a loss. In the illustrated example, as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, a loss (non-winning) is selected, the variable time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variable display is set to end at time t2. is being done. Specifically, the time from t1 to t2 is set to the variable timer for the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and the time during which the variable display is executed is subtracted from the variable timer.

Next, at time t2, since the variable timer for the first special symbol reaches 0, the variable display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss. Incidentally, the result of the internal lottery for the stopped and displayed first special symbol is non-winning, so the skip function does not operate for the second special symbol here. Therefore, the variable display regarding the second special symbol is continued. That is, the variable timer relating to the second special symbol (at the time of the big hit) is never replaced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins the start winning hole related to the other special symbol during the variable display at the time of the big hit (or at the time of the small hit) in one special symbol, the other special symbol Of the internal lotteries related to the design, the jackpot lottery is not executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is displayed in fluctuation at the time of the big hit, the other special symbol is in a non-lottery state.

[(B) in FIG. 38: Example of operation of variable time measurement temporary stop function]
The state of each special symbol at the time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is waiting for a change, and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable display at the time of a small hit.

Then, at time t1, with the entry of the game ball into the starting winning hole corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is based on the result of the internal lottery. A variable display is started on the display device 34 . Here, since the second special symbol is being changed and displayed at the time of the small winning, no big winning lottery or small winning lottery is executed in the internal lottery for the first special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery will be a loss. In the illustrated example, a loss is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the variation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. there is Specifically, the time from t1 to t2 is set to the variable timer for the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and the time during which the variable display is executed is subtracted from the variable timer.

However, here, at time tx, which is the time between time t1 and time t2, it is assumed that the variation of the second special symbol at the time of the small hit ends. Then, after the time tx, a small winning game relating to the second special symbol is executed. Here, it is assumed that a small winning game is executed from time tx to time t2. Then, the variable time measurement suspension function is activated, and the measurement of the variable time of the first special symbol is suspended. Triggered by the end of the small winning game at time t2, measurement of the remaining variation time is restarted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins the start winning hole for the other special symbol during the variable display at the time of the small hit in one special symbol, the internal lottery for the other special symbol The big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are not executed. Then, when the small winning game by one special symbol is started, the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is restarted after the small winning game is finished. be. It should be noted that a big winning lottery may be performed during the small winning variation.

[(C) in FIG. 38: Example of skip function operation]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is waiting for a change, and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state at the time of losing.

Then, at time t1, with the entry of the game ball into the starting winning hole corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is based on the result of the internal lottery. A variable display is started on the display device 34 . Here, since the second special pattern is being changed and displayed when it is lost, a big winning lottery is first executed in the internal lottery for the first special pattern, and a small winning lottery is performed when the big winning does not apply. That is, it represents that the first special symbol is in a state in which the big hit lottery can be executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big win, a small win or a loss. In addition, when the small hit is not selected in the first special symbol lottery, the big hit or loss corresponds. In the illustrated example, a big hit is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the variation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. there is Specifically, the time from t1 to t2 is set to the variable timer for the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and the time during which the variable display is executed is subtracted from the variable timer.

Next, at time t2, since the variable timer for the first special symbol reaches 0, the variable display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a big hit. In addition, the result of the internal lottery for the stopped and displayed first special symbol is a big hit, and furthermore, since the variable display for the second special symbol is being executed, the skip function is activated. Then, by the operation of this skip function, the fluctuation display at the time of losing or the small hit regarding the second special symbol is terminated (forced termination means). Specifically, the variable timer for the second special symbol is replaced with 0. Therefore, the set variable time is skipped. It should be noted that, unlike the operation example of FIG. 38(B), the variation display for the skipped second special symbol is not executed again.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the start winning opening related to the other special symbol during the fluctuation display at the time of loss in one special symbol, the internal lottery related to the other special symbol wins a jackpot lottery or a small lottery. A lottery will be held. That is, when one of the special symbols is not in the variable display at the time of the big win or the small win, the other special symbol is in a state where the big win lottery or the small win lottery is possible. For example, as described above, when the game ball wins the start winning hole corresponding to the first special symbol during the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is lost or when the second special symbol is waiting for variation, the first Among internal lotteries related to special symbols, a big win lottery is first executed, and then a small win lottery is executed. In addition, during the fluctuation display at the time of losing or the small hit regarding one special pattern (second special pattern), the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit regarding the other special pattern (first special pattern) was started and ended after the fluctuation time elapsed. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is skipped, and the variable display can be forcibly terminated.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 in FIG. 15 or step S4900 in FIG. 16). Each procedure will be described below. The contents of the special symbol stop display process described below can also be common in the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process. That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game process, the control target is the first special symbol, and when applied to the second special symbol game process, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer for the special symbols to be controlled (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 15 or step S1900b in FIG. 16) in the next interrupt cycle, and special symbol stop display processing repeatedly.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has expired (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol-fluctuation flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbols has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the small hit flag value (01H) is set.

Step S4603: Then, when it is confirmed that the small hit flag value (01H) is set (step S4300: Yes), the main control CPU 72 confirms whether the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. do. This confirmation process is for confirming whether or not it is necessary to operate the variable time measurement temporary stop function for the other special symbol as the variation display at the time of the small hit of the target special symbol ends. executed.

Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable display (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next steps S4604a as it is necessary to operate the variable time measurement temporary stop function for the other special symbol. And step S4604b is executed. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (No), the main control CPU 72 determines that the other special symbol is not variably displayed and there is no need to operate the variable time measurement temporary stop function. then executes step S4605.

Step S4604a: The main control CPU72 executes the process of activating the variable time measurement temporary stop function for the other special symbol, that is, the process of saving the variation information of the other special symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU72, in order to temporarily stop the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the current value of the fluctuation timer (the value of the remaining fluctuation time) and the information of the stop design to the RAM76 Execute the save process.

Step S4604b: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to turn ON the variable time measurement temporary stop flag stored in the RAM 76 (variable time measurement temporary stop means). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended.

Step S4605: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (during small win game)" as an internal state flag on control for the special symbol to be controlled. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the special symbol to be controlled is in the midst of a small winning game. The state command indicating that the small winning game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4600: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. If the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When elected]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table for the special symbol to be controlled to "variable winning device management process at the time of big hit". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated, and the variation time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big role) is started, the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 round probability variable symbol", a value corresponding to "16 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "9 round normal symbol" or "9 round probability variable symbol", a value representing "9 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the special symbols to be controlled are in the middle of a big hit. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 18). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 round probability variable symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "16 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "9 rounds normal symbol" or "9 rounds probability variable symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "9 rounds". The generated continuous actuation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit flag value (01H) is not set in step S4300 (No), then step S4600 is executed.
Then, if the big hit flag value (01H) is not set and it is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

After finishing the processing of step S4500, step S4602 or step S4606, the main control CPU72 returns to the special symbol game processing (FIG. 15 or 16).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are performed by the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34 as already described. Special symbol display device 35, normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Generate and output a drive signal to be applied to each LED It is a process to

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the gaming state display device . First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the probability change state display lamp 38d and the time reduction state display lamp 38e according to the value of the probability change function operation flag or the variable time reduction function operation flag. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the probability variation function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. It should be noted that the probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to light until a jackpot game relating to special symbols is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbols is performed a specified number of times, and then non- Displayed (turned off). On the other hand, if the variable time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), regardless of whether or not the power is turned on, the main control CPU 72 turns on the LED corresponding to the time reduction status display lamp 38e. Output a signal. Furthermore, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. In this case, the main control CPU 72 determines the shooting direction of the game ball (shooting direction determination means) according to the progress of the game (the value of the special game management status and the internal state). For example, if the game state is a left-handed game state (if it is a low probability non-time shortening state, if it is a low probability time shortening state, if it is a jackpot game state using the first variable winning device 30), the main control The CPU 72 determines that the game ball should be shot to the first game area (left-handed area). On the other hand, when the game state is a right-handed game state (when it is a high-probability non-time-reduction state, when it is a big-hit game state or a small-hit game state using the second variable winning device 31), the main control CPU72 determines that the game ball should be shot to the second playing area (right hitting area). Then, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the game state is the right-handed game state, it outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. In addition, in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a firing position designation command. The firing position specification command includes information identifying whether the game state is the left-handed game state or the right-handed game state. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device.

In addition, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a, 38b corresponding to the jackpot pattern specified by the value of the number of continuous operation status is the target for outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "16 rounds (16R)". Also, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "9 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "9 rounds (9R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit includes the game process selection process at the time of the big win (step S5100), the process for opening the pattern of opening the big winning prize at the time of the big win (step S5200), the process of opening and closing the big winning prize opening at the time of the big win (step S5300), and the big win at the time of the big win. This configuration includes a group of subroutines of winning opening closing processing (step S5400) and jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot time variable winning device management process to the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the next jump as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of the big hit has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big winning (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens and closes the big winning opening at the time of the big hit. If the operation process is completed, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) at the time of big hit is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process and the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit are repeatedly executed for the set number of consecutive operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU72 selects the next jump destination as the ending process at the time of the big win ( Step S5500) is selected. Each process will be described in more detail below.

The main control CPU 72 can transmit a jackpot game command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress to the effect control device 124 when the jackpot game is in progress.

[Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of big winning. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes symbol-specific open pattern selection processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72, according to the winning pattern of this time, the opening pattern of the big winning opening (the number of times of opening each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, the number of counts in one round (maximum number of wins). The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big win shown in FIG.

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning pattern selected in the jackpot stop pattern determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 18). Specifically, if the major classification "16 round probability variable design" is selected as the winning design, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. Also, if the "9 round normal symbol" or "9 round probability variable symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 9 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program ("8" for 9 times, "15" for 16 times).

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern operation pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 . Incidentally, if a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the opening timer at the time of a big hit, the opening time is sufficient for a ball to easily enter the big winning opening during one opening. (for example, the time for 10 or more game balls to be shot by the shooting control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or longer). On the other hand, if 0.1 second is set as the value of the opening timer at the time of a big hit, the opening time does not occur (it becomes difficult even if it is not impossible to enter the big winning opening during one opening). ) for a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second, preferably less than the interval between shots of game balls by the shot control board set 174).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot time interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here will be the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big win (FIG. 41).

[Big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a big win. This process is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation. can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the big winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the big winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning hole 30b or the second big winning hole 31b. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big win shown in FIG. As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 42) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time for the big winning opening has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5308. to run.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls winning the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first big winning port 30b or the second big winning port 31b during opening) is counted during the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the open time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit (FIG. 41). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the big hit at the present stage, so the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined at step S5306 that the large winning opening opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number at step S5310 (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5312. Run.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening 30b or the second big winning opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts down the big winning hole interval timer set in the big winning big winning hole opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 42).

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer has not become 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 41) at the time of big hit. Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of big hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big winning opening interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the open number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined by, for example, ``opening the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 a plurality of times in one round during the jackpot''. This is to correspond to the open pattern.
When the pattern of repeating the opening and closing operations multiple times within one round is not adopted as in this embodiment (see FIG. 17), the "number of times set in the current round" in each round is set to 1 in each round. set each time. Therefore, in each round, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening/closing operation (Yes), so the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322.

On the other hand, if a pattern is adopted in which opening and closing operations are repeated multiple times within one round, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening operation (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the big hit at the present stage, so the above steps S5301 to S5320 are performed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening counter is incremented in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big win (Fig. 41). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit.

[Big winning opening closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. This big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the first round is completed, and the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage toward the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set execution round number. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the incremented round number counter value (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set execution round number (1 to 15 after subtracting 1) (No) , then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the number-of-winning-balls counter, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit (FIG. 41).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 performs the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the next jump in the game process selection process at the time of the big win (step S5100 in FIG. 41). to run. After the execution of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the closing process of the big winning opening at the time of the big hit again after executing the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit, and performs the above steps S5402 to S5408. Execute repeatedly. Thus, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously performed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 times or 16 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Steps S5410, S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (=0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to end processing at the time of the big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the number-of-winning-balls counter, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit (FIG. 41). As a result, next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the end process at the time of the big hit is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of end processing at the time of a big hit. This end processing at the time of the big win is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big win. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the initial value to the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (each time this module is called) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not passed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 terminates this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 41) at the time of the big hit.

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit game state ends in the control processing of the main control CPU 72 . Also, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the big win as an internal state on the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function activation flag. This flag is set at the time of the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 18) during the preceding special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5508: If a value is set in the probability variation function operation flag (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the probability variation number of times (for example, 10000 times). The value of the set probability variation count is stored in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, for example, and becomes the above-described frequency cutting counter value. The probability variable number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since no substantial upper limit is provided for the high probability state, the probability that the variable probability count is reduced to 0 times is low. In addition, if the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the fluctuation time reduction function activation flag. This flag is set at the time of the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 18) during the preceding special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5512: And, if the variable time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times). The set value of the number of times of time saving is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time saving frequency set here becomes the upper limit frequency for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. In addition, if the value of the variable time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, in accordance with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the big win, a state designation command representing "normal" as the game state is generated. In addition, if the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state designation command representing "high probability medium" is generated as the internal state, and if the fluctuation time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction Generates a state specifying command representing "medium". These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the big hit.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 15, step S1900b in FIG. 16) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-processing. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 41) at the time of the big hit.

[Variable winning device management process at the time of small hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. Small-hit time variable winning device management processing includes small-hit time game process selection processing (step S6100), small-hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S6200), small-hit time big winning opening opening/closing operation processing (step S6300). , large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit (step S6400), and subroutine group of end process at the time of small hit (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit as the address of the return destination in the stack pointer. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of the small hit (step S6200) as the next jump destination. do. On the other hand, if the small-hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small-hitting big winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening opening/closing operation process is completed, the small winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the small-hit big winning opening opening/closing operation process and the small-hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations, the main control CPU 72 selects the next jump destination as the small-hitting end process (step S6500). Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Processing for setting the pattern of opening the big winning opening at the time of the small hit]
FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a big winning opening at the time of a small hit. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the "small hit opening pattern". In the present embodiment, a "small hit opening pattern" is set according to the winning pattern. For example, when one-time opening is selected, an opening pattern of “0.6 seconds open” is set, and when a two-time opening pattern is selected, “0.8 seconds open” is set for each of the first and second times. is set. Since there is no concept of "round" for the "small hit", the "open pattern" is also written as "first release" and "second release".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of openings of the large winning opening to, for example, two times based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The release count set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hit opening timer. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time per time when the second variable winning device 31 is operated.

Step S6218: The main control CPU72 sets an interval timer at the time of a small hit. The value of the timer set here is the standby time for each time when the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small win. is set to a time (for example, about 2 seconds) in which the images are lined up without gaps.

Step S6220: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a small win (FIG. 46). Then, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S6300).

The main control CPU 72 can transmit a small-hit start command indicating that the small-hit game has started to the effect control device 124 at the start of the small-hit game.
When the main control CPU 72 is in the small winning game, it is possible to transmit a command during the small winning game to the effect control device 124 indicating that the small winning game is in progress.
The main control CPU 72 can transmit a small-hit end command indicating that the small-hit game has ended to the effect control device 124 at the end of the small-hit game.

[Big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process. This processing is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 at the time of a small hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to check whether the interval timer is counting down.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the second big winning opening 31b. Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 . As a result, the second variable prize winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small winning opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 47) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. to run.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls winning the second variable winning device 31 (the second big winning opening 31b during opening) is counted within the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the open time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the small hit at the present stage, so the main control CPU 72 executes the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the steps.

If it is determined that the open time has ended in step S6306 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6312.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the second big winning opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the driving signal applied to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts down the interval timer set in the above-described small-hit time big winning opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 47).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable during the small hit Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 46). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 46). Then, when the small-hit time variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small-hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small-hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after increment has reached the set open number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of small winning (step S6214 in FIG. 47). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the small winning game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 46), which is the next jump destination, the big winning opening opening/closing operation process. to run. Then, after executing the small winning big winning opening opening and closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the small winning big winning opening closing process again, until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of openings (twice). , the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6418.

Step S6418, step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU72 resets the opening number counter (=0), the next jump destination is set to end processing at the time of a small hit.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process at the time of the small hit is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the end processing at the time of a small hit. This end processing at the time of a small win is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small win. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S6502: The main control CPU72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the initial value to the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer with the passage of time (each time this module is called).

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time of the small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 terminates this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Steps S6506, S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "during small hit game" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small win, such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag, especially since the internal conditioning device is not activated.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the small hit.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 15, step S1900b in FIG. 16) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the game flow that is developed when the normal mode corresponds to "9 round normal symbols" or "9 round probability variable symbols".

When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. [F1] In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is a "low-probability non-time-reduction state", so by entering a game ball into the upper start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game starts. progressing.

[F1] In the normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "9 round normal pattern", [F3] 9 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, [F4] you are defeated in the battle of the production during the big role. , [F5] Shift to coast mode.

[F5] In the coast mode, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "low probability state" and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is "high probability state" (low probability time reduction state). [F5] If no winning result is obtained in the coast mode and the [F6] special symbols fluctuate 100 times, the mode shifts to [F1] normal mode.
In the [F5] coast mode, mainly the first special symbol changes, so the game flow is the same as in the normal mode.

[F1] In normal mode, [F7] If you win the "9 round probability variation pattern" jackpot, [F3] 9 round jackpot game (battle bonus) will be executed, [F8] Win the battle during the big role , [F9] Transition to fireworks rush. [F9] Fireworks Rush has a "high probability state" in the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and a "low probability state" in the normal symbol lottery (high probability non-reduced time state).

Although not shown in the figure, [F1] If a "16-round probability variable pattern" jackpot is achieved in the normal mode, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F9] a transition to a fireworks rush.

[Game Flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the game flow developed when "16 round probability variable pattern", "9 round probability variable pattern" or "9 round normal pattern" is applied in the fireworks rush.

[F9] Fireworks Rush If you win the [G1] ``16 round probability variable pattern'' jackpot, [G2] 16 rounds jackpot game (special bonus) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, transition to [F9] Fireworks Rush. do.

[F9] Fireworks Rush If you win the [G3] "9 round probability variable pattern" jackpot, [G4] 9 rounds jackpot game (normal bonus) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, transition to [F9] Fireworks Rush do.

[F9] If a jackpot of [G5] ``9 round normal pattern'' is won in [F9] fireworks rush, [G4] 9 round jackpot game (normal bonus) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, [F5] shift to coast mode. do.

It should be noted that the game flow described above is an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, several examples of effect images actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. As described above, when the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lighting/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, the visual appeal is poor. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 executes a variable display performance using performance symbols and the like.

The production pattern includes, for example, an upper stage production pattern, a middle stage production pattern, and a lower stage production pattern, and these are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each of the production patterns is designed as a picture card with characters attached thereto, for example, along with the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the upper stage effect pattern constitutes a pattern row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1", and the middle stage effect pattern and the lower stage effect pattern are arranged in ascending order of numbers "1" to "9". It constitutes a pattern row lined up. Such a pattern row is variably displayed so as to flow horizontally (scroll leftward) in the upper, middle, and lower areas of the screen.

In addition, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a memory marker indicating the number of working memories, a marker indicating that the pattern is changing, a number holding marker, and an upper stage, middle stage, and lower stage production pattern are displayed. It is possible to display "fourth symbols Z1, Z2 (fourth effect symbols)".

53 to 55 are continuous diagrams showing a first example of the fireworks rush effect.
The first example of effect is an example of effect when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a loss and the change of loss is selected.
The fireworks rush is in a so-called small hit rush state (a state in which small hits frequently occur when hitting right).

In FIG. 53 (A): The deviation variation of the second special symbol in the fireworks rush is executed. Note that the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a state of being changed. In addition, the first special symbol is in a stopped state. In the illustrated example, 0F is displayed after the start of fluctuation. One second is 30F (frame).

In the fireworks rush, the game is played by hitting to the right. A game ball hit to the right may enter the right starting winning hole 27 or may enter the deceleration passage 400 without entering the right starting winning hole 27.例文帳に追加Then, the game ball passing through the deceleration passage 400 goes to the second variable winning device 31. - 特許庁Here, since the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening/closing member 31a and goes downstream.

[Point production]
In the lower center of the screen, a game ball enters the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (first big winning port or second big winning port) during the big win or small win rush. Thus, the total number of game balls put out by the payout control device 92 is displayed as a payout point P.

In the illustrated example, since "1200" is displayed as the payout point P, 1200 game balls have been generated by entering the big winning holes (the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole) by this time. It indicates that the payment has been made.

(B) in FIG. 53: The production pattern is in high speed fluctuation. In the illustrated example, the 20th F after the start of fluctuation is displayed.

(C) in FIG. 54: The upper effect symbol (upper line) is stopped (“8”-“blank symbol”-“7”). In the illustrated example, the 35th F after the start of fluctuation is displayed.

(D) in FIG. 54: The lower production pattern (lower line) is stopped (“5”-“Blank pattern”-“6”). In the illustrated example, the 55th F after the start of fluctuation is displayed.

(E) in FIG. 55: The middle stage effect symbol (middle stage line) is stopped (“1”-“Blank symbol”-“2”). In the illustrated example, the 75th F after the start of fluctuation is displayed. Then, when the middle stage performance pattern is stopped, the shaking performance of the performance pattern is started, and this shaking performance continues for 35F.

(F) in FIG. 55: A stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronism with the stop display of the special symbols. The stop display effect is executed in a manner that does not accompany the shaking effect of the effect pattern. The fixed start is the 105th F after the start of fluctuation, the fixed time continues for 15F, and the fixed end is reached at the 120th F. The fourth pattern Z2 is stopped and displayed in a displaced manner.

Since the second variable prize winning device 31 does not shift to the open state even after the loss variation ends, the game ball rolls on the opening/closing member 31a and goes downstream.

56 to 62 are continuous diagrams showing a second example of the fireworks rush effect.
The second example of effect is an example of effect when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a small win and a variation of a small win is selected.
In addition, since the flow of the production until the middle stage production pattern stops is the same even when it is a loss fluctuation or when it is a small hit fluctuation, an example of production up to that point is omitted.
The following example of effect is an example of effect executed following the example of effect shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 .

(A) in FIG. 56: The middle stage effect symbol (middle stage line) is stopped (“1”-“Blank symbol”-“2”). In the illustrated example, the 75th F after the start of fluctuation is displayed. In the case of loss fluctuation, when the middle stage production pattern is stopped, the shaking production of the production pattern is started, but in the case of the small hit fluctuation, the shaking production of the production pattern is not executed.

(B) in FIG. 56: A stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronism with the stop display of the special symbols. The stop display effect is executed in a manner that does not accompany the shaking effect of the effect pattern. For example, the fixed start is the 75th F after the start of fluctuation, the fixed time continues for 8 ms, the opening of the small win game is executed for 8 ms, the second variable winning device 31 opens for 684 ms, and the small win The ending of the game and the entry valid time (TZ) of the small winning game are each executed within 800 ms. It should be noted that the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in the form of a small win.

When the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a small-hit mode, a small-hit game is started. When the small winning game is started, the second variable winning device 31 is opened by pulling the opening/closing member 31a to the back side. Therefore, the game ball passes through the side of the opening/closing member 31a and enters the second big winning hole 31b, and eventually the second count switch 85 detects the entering ball.

[Enlarged performance]
(C) in FIG. 57: When a predetermined first frame elapses after the start of the small winning game, an enlarged effect is executed. The enlargement effect is a effect of enlarging and displaying the display of the payout point P while moving it to the center of the screen. The predetermined first frame can be set to an arbitrary value according to game specifications, and can be, for example, the 15th frame from the start of the small win.

[First cut-in performance]
(D) in FIG. 57: When the first ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85 during the small winning game, the first cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in performance is a performance that may be executed twice at maximum during one small winning game. The cut-in effect here is the effect of displaying the first character C1 of the normal pattern from the left side of the screen. Further, when the second count switch 85 detects the entry of a ball, a count-up effect of counting up (scrolling display) the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started. Reproduction of the count-up SE ends when the value of the count-up counter becomes 0 (the same applies hereinafter). The count-up SE is a sound that expresses the rotation of the drum, and is output from a speaker or the like.

[Second cut-in performance]
(E) in FIG. 58: When the second ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85 during the small winning game, the second cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect here is the effect of displaying the second character C2 of the normal pattern from the right side of the screen. Further, when the second count switch 85 detects the entry of a ball, a count-up effect for counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

[Reduced production]
(F) in FIG. 58: When a predetermined second frame elapses after the start of the small winning game, a reduction effect is executed. The reduction effect is an effect (returning to the original display mode) in which the display of the payout point P is reduced while being moved to the lower center of the screen. The display of the payout point P is "1230". The predetermined second frame can be set to an arbitrary value according to the specifications of the game, and can be, for example, the 60th frame from the start of the small win.

(G) in FIG. 59: When the small winning game ends, the next variation starts. In this case, since the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening/closing member 31a and goes downstream.

[Small hit game, enlarged effect]
(H) in FIG. 59: When the second special symbol is stop-displayed in a small-hit mode, a small-hit game is started. When a predetermined first frame elapses after the start of the small winning game, an enlarged performance is executed.

[First cut-in performance]
(I) in FIG. 60: When the first ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85 during the small winning game, the first cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect here is the effect of displaying the special pattern third character C13 from the left side of the screen. In addition, when the second count switch 85 detects the entry of a ball, a count-up effect for counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

[Prohibition of second cut-in production]
(J) in FIG. 60: When the second ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85 during the small winning game, the second cut-in effect is normally executed. However, here, the second cut-in effect is not executed because the transition is to the specific effect prohibited section. Details of the specific effect prohibited section will be described later. Further, when the second count switch 85 detects the entry of a ball, a count-up effect for counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

[Reduced production]
(K) in FIG. 61: When a predetermined second frame elapses after the start of the small winning game, a reduction effect is executed. The reduction effect is a effect in which the display of the payout point P is moved to the lower center of the screen and displayed in a reduced size. The display of the payout point P is "1260".

(L) in FIG. 61: When the small winning game ends, the next variation starts. In this case, since the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening/closing member 31a and goes downstream.

[Small hit game, enlarged effect]
(M) in FIG. 62: When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game is started. Further, when a predetermined first frame elapses after the start of the small winning game, an enlarged effect is executed.

[First cut-in performance]
(N) in FIG. 62: When the first ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85 during the small winning game, the first cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect here is the effect of displaying the fourth character C4 of the normal pattern from the right side of the screen. Thus, even if the cut-in effect is prohibited, the rule of alternately displaying characters on the left and right is kept. Further, when the second count switch 85 detects the entry of a ball, a count-up effect for counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. All of the various effects described above are controlled through the following control processing.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. As shown in FIG. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from reset start (main) process (not shown), for example. The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

Effect control processing includes command reception processing (step S400), working memory effect management processing (step S401), effect design management processing (step S402), effect management processing during fireworks rush (step S403), and display output processing (step S404). , lamp drive processing (step S406), sound drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). The basic flow of the effect control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives a command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Also, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. It should be noted that the production commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special destination judgment production command, a production command when the number of working memories is increased, a production command when the number of working memories is decreased, a start winning sound control command, and a demonstration production. Command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop pattern command, state designation command, round number command, number cut counter value command, variation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, firing position designation command, jackpot There are a game in-game command, a small-hit game start command, a small-hit game in-command, a small-hit game end command, a prize content command, and the like.

Step S401: In the working memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the memory display effect using a memory marker or the like while referring to the effect command when the number of working memories increases, the effect command when the number of working memories decreases, and the like. .

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the fourth symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, and the first variable winning device 30 or It controls the contents of the performance during the opening and closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 (performance executing means). In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various advance notice effects (previous notice effects before occurrence of reach, notice effects after occurrence of reach, etc.).

Step S403: In the fireworks rush effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of managing the details of the effects to be executed during the fireworks rush. Details of the processing will be described later.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 gives the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol , operating memory effect pattern number, pre-reading forewarning effect pattern number, fluctuation effect pattern number, fluctuation time forewarning effect number, background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP 152) controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect contents (effect executing means).

Step S<b>406 : In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132 . In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next sound driving process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect, BGM, voice data, etc.) to the sound drive circuit 134. instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds corresponding to the content of the presentation.

Step S410: In effect random number update processing, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. FIG. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for advance notice selection, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronism with the image display by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

[Production pattern management process]
FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol management process. Effect symbol management processing includes execution selection processing (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and when the variable winning device is in operation. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). The basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next As the jump destination of the production symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. In addition, the variable winning device operation time processing (step S508) is selected as a jump destination when the variable winning device management processing at the time of the big hit is selected in the main control CPU 72 or when the variable winning device management processing at the time of the small win is selected. be. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs the work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the notice effect (pre-occurrence notice pattern, after-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls a demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when the performance using the performance switching button 45 is performed during execution of the variable display performance using the performance pattern, the performance control CPU 126 monitors whether the player has operated the performance button, and the performance according to the result. The display control CPU 146 is instructed to control information of contents (button effect).

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using effect symbols and moving images in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually terminates the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbols, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect). means).

Step S508: In the processing when the variable winning device is activated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of the 16-round variable probability big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect pattern during the big role of the 16-round variable probability big hit as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and transmits this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). to indicate. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays the image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Production management processing during fireworks rush]
65 to 67 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the fireworks rush effect management process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is time to start the fireworks rush. Whether or not it is time to start the fireworks rush can be confirmed by whether or not this processing is executed for the first time after the game state has shifted to the high probability non-time reduction state. The game state can be confirmed by a state designation command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is time to start the fireworks rush (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902. to run.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of displaying a background image for the fireworks rush and displaying an image of the payout points P used for the point effect. It is preferable that the initial value displayed in the payout point P is the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game as the initial value. However, the initial value displayed for the payout point P may be zero.

Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is time to start a small hit. Whether or not it is time to start the small winning can be confirmed by the small winning game start command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906, and when it cannot be confirmed that it is the start of the small hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 is step S908. to run.

Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of activating the small hit ACT. The small hit ACT is a module that manages the elapsed time (elapsed frame) during the small hit game.

Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a predetermined first frame has passed since the start of the small hit. Whether or not a predetermined first frame has passed is managed by the small winning ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the predetermined first frame has passed since the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S910 and confirms that the predetermined first frame has passed since the start of the small hit. If not possible (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes enlargement effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the payout points P in an enlarged manner.

Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a predetermined second frame has passed since the start of the small hit. Whether or not the predetermined second frame has passed is managed by the small winning ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the predetermined second frame has passed since the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S914 and confirms that the predetermined second frame has passed since the start of the small hit. If not possible (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916 (connection symbol A→A).

Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes reduction effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for reducing (returning to the original position) the payout point P displayed in an enlarged manner.
After completing this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916 (connection symbol A→A).

Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a prescribed first frame has passed since the start of the small hit. Whether or not the specified first frame has passed is managed by the small winning ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the prescribed first frame (for example, 70F) has passed since the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S918, and the prescribed first frame has passed since the start of the small hit. If it cannot be confirmed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S920.

Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for setting the second cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON. By setting the second cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON, a specific effect prohibition section (second prohibition section) is set.

Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a specified second frame (for example, 95F) has passed since the start of the small hit. Whether the specified second frame has passed or not is managed by the small winning ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the prescribed second frame has passed since the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S922 and confirms that the prescribed second frame has passed since the start of the small hit. If not possible (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S924.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for setting the first cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON. By setting the first cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON, a specific effect prohibition section (first prohibition section) is set.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, when a predetermined time has elapsed during execution of a small winning game (special game), is a specific game that prohibits execution of a cut-in effect (specific effect). An effect prohibited section can be set (specific effect prohibited section setting means). The specific effect prohibited section is a section in which execution of the cut-in effect (specific effect) is prohibited.

The specific effect prohibition section is a first prohibition section that prohibits the execution of the first specific effect (the section from turning on the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect until the end of the small winning game), and the second time. There is a second prohibition interval (interval from when the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect is turned ON until the end of the small winning game) for prohibiting execution of the specific effect.

The second prohibited section is set before the first prohibited section (the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is turned ON after 70F from the start of the small hit, and the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect is set). turns ON after 95F from the start of the small hit).
The first prohibited section is set in the second prohibited section (the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect is turned ON while the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is ON).
The end timing of the first prohibited section and the second prohibited section is the same (when the small hit ends, the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect and the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect are turned OFF). Become).

The cut-in effect (specific effect) has a first cut-in effect (first specific effect) and a second cut-in effect (second specific effect).
The predetermined conditions for not executing the cut-in effect are the condition that the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect that prohibits the first cut-in effect is turned ON (first predetermined condition), and the second cut-in effect. There is a condition (second predetermined condition) that the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect that prohibits the in effect is turned ON.
The prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect turns ON before the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect (the second predetermined condition is set before the first predetermined condition).
The prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect and the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect may turn OFF at the same time (the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition must end at the same time). there is).

Step S924: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the first ball entry has occurred during the small winning game. Whether or not the first ball entry has occurred can be confirmed by the prize ball content command. In addition to the prize ball command, the number of prize balls when winning a general prize mouth (normal prize mouth 22, etc.), the start mouth (upper start prize mouth 26, right start prize mouth 27, lower start prize mouth 28b, etc.) ), the number of winning balls may be targeted.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the first ball entry has occurred (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S926, and when it cannot be confirmed that the first ball entry has occurred (No), the effect control The CPU 126 executes step S936 (connection symbol B→B).

Step S926: The effect control CPU 126 executes count-up counter calculation processing. Details of the count-up counter calculation process will be described later.

Step S928: The effect control CPU 126 executes count-up effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for counting up the payout point P number. The count-up effect is a effect that is updated and displayed at predetermined update intervals.

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 updates and displays at a predetermined update interval when a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during execution of a small winning game (special game). A count-up effect (first effect) can be executed (first effect executing means).

Step S930: The production control CPU 126 executes sound production start processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for starting reproduction of the count-up SE.

Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for confirming whether or not the first cut-in effect prohibition flag is OFF.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is OFF (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S934 and confirms that the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is OFF. cannot be confirmed (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is ON, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S936 (connection symbol B→B).

Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 executes cut-in effect lottery processing. Details of the cut-in effect lottery process will be described later.
After completing this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S936 (connection symbol B→B).

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, when a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during execution of a small winning game (special game), uses the entering ball as a trigger to cut-in effect ( specific effect) can be executed (specific effect executing means).

Step S936: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a second ball entry has occurred during the small winning game. Whether or not the second ball is entered can be confirmed by the prize ball content command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the second entry has occurred (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S938, and when it cannot be confirmed that the second entry has occurred (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S948.

Step S938: The effect control CPU 126 executes count-up counter calculation processing. Details of the count-up counter calculation process will be described later.

Step S940: The effect control CPU 126 executes count-up effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for counting up the payout point P number. The count-up effect is a effect that is updated and displayed at predetermined update intervals.

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 updates and displays at a predetermined update interval when a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during execution of a small winning game (special game). A count-up effect (first effect) can be executed (first effect executing means).

Step S942: The effect control CPU 126 executes sound effect start processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for starting reproduction of the count-up SE. When the count-up SE due to the first ball entry is being reproduced, it is possible to execute a process of selecting an effect pattern for continuing the reproduction of the count-up SE.

Step S944: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for confirming whether or not the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is OFF.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is OFF (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S946 to confirm that the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is OFF. cannot be confirmed (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is ON, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S948.

Step S946: The effect control CPU 126 executes cut-in effect lottery processing. Details of the cut-in effect lottery process will be described later.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, when a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during execution of a small winning game (special game), uses the entering ball as a trigger to cut-in effect ( specific effect) can be executed (specific effect executing means).

Step S948: The effect control CPU 126 executes count-up counter update processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting the count-up counter. For example, the count-up counter decrements by 1 after one frame has elapsed. If this process is executed once per frame, the count-up counter is decremented by 1 each time this process is executed.

Step S950: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the count-up counter is zero.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the count-up counter is 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S952, and when it cannot be confirmed that the count-up counter is 0 (No), that is, counts up When confirming that the counter is a value other than 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S954.

Step S952: The production control CPU 126 executes sound production end processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 ends (stops) the reproduction of the count-up SE.

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 reproduces the count-up SE (second effect ) can be started, and the reproduction of the count-up SE can be ended based on a predetermined number of prize balls and a predetermined update interval (second effect executing means).

Step S954: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the end of the small hit. Whether or not it is the end of the small winning can be confirmed by a small winning game end command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the end of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S956, and when it cannot be confirmed that it is the end of the small hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect. Return to the process (FIG. 63).

Step S956: The effect control CPU 126 sets the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect to OFF.
Step S958: The effect control CPU 126 sets the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect to OFF.
After finishing the above process, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 63).

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect is ON (when a predetermined condition is set) or when the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is set. When it is ON (when a predetermined condition is set), even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during execution of a small winning game (special game), a cut-in effect (specific effect) is performed. It can be set not to be executed (specific effect executing means).

When the cut-in effect (specific effect) is executed multiple times, it is displayed alternately on the left and right, such as "display from the left" → "display from the right" → "display from the left" (executed according to a predetermined rule). ).
When the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect is ON or when the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is ON, the cut-in effect lottery process itself is not executed, so the specific effect prohibited section Even if the execution of the cut-in effect is prohibited by the setting of , the cut-in effect is alternately displayed on the left and right sides.

[Count-up counter calculation process]
FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of count-up counter calculation processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S960: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for calculating a count-up counter (special value).
The count-up counter can be calculated based on the calculation formula of "count-up counter = number of prize balls x update interval + count-up counter". The reason why the value of the "count-up counter" is added in addition to assigning the value of "number of prize balls x update interval" to the count-up counter is that the current "count-up counter" contains a value other than 0. If so, the value of "number of prize balls x update interval" is added to the value (if the count-up SE is being played again, the playback time of the count-up SE is extended).

The number of prize balls can be confirmed by a prize content command (main command).
The update interval is the update interval of the count-up effect, and is predetermined according to the specifications of the game machine.
After completing the above processing, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect management processing during fireworks rush (FIG. 66 or FIG. 67).

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 calculates the value (special value) of the count-up counter by multiplying the number of prize balls (predetermined number of prize balls) and the update interval (predetermined update interval). Then, the calculated count-up counter value is updated for each frame (as time passes), and when the updated count-up counter value reaches 0 (specified value), playback of the count-up SE is terminated. (second effect executing means).

[Cut-in effect lottery process]
FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of cut-in effect lottery processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S970: The effect control CPU 126 executes character lottery processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining a character to be displayed in the cut-in effect by lottery. The character to be selected is determined except for the character displayed last time.

Step S972: The effect control CPU 126 executes display pattern lottery processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining by lottery whether the character selected in step S970 is to be displayed in a normal pattern or a special pattern.

Step S974: The effect control CPU 126 executes an appearance direction lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a lottery process to determine whether the character selected in step S970 appears from the left side or from the right side.
After completing the above processing, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect management processing during fireworks rush (FIG. 66 or FIG. 67).

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a list of characters displayed in a cut-in effect.
Six characters, 1st to 6th characters, are prepared for the characters to be displayed in the cut-in effect.
In addition, each character has a normal pattern character (first character C1 to sixth character C6) that does not wear a hat and glasses, and a special pattern character that wears a hat and glasses (first character C11 to A sixth character C16) is prepared.

For example, when the first character C1 of the normal pattern is displayed in the first winning of the small win, the first character C1 of the normal pattern and the first character C11 of the special pattern are displayed in the second winning of the small win. character is displayed.
In addition, when the first character C1 of the normal pattern is displayed in the first prize at the time of the small hit, in the second prize at the time of the small hit, the first character C1 of the special pattern is displayed except for the first character C1 of the normal pattern. The character C11 may be included in the selection candidates.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an outline of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is 1 frame.
In FIG. 71 (A): A small winning game has been started.
(B) in FIG. 71: When the game ball wins (enters) the second variable prize winning device 31, at the payout point P, the count-up effect is started. The display of the payout point P is "1500".
(C) in FIG. 71: After one frame (1F) has passed, the value of the payout point P increases by one and becomes "1501".
(D) in FIG. 71: After one frame (1F) has passed, the value of the payout point P increases by one and becomes "1502".
When the number of prize balls is large (for example, when the number is 10 or more), the count-up effect can be quickly ended by setting the update interval to 1 frame.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an outline of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is two frames.
In FIG. 72 (A): A small winning game has been started.
(B) in FIG. 72: When the game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, at the payout point P, the count-up effect is started. The display of the payout point P is "1500".
(C) in FIG. 72: When two frames (2F) have passed, the value of the payout point P increases by one and becomes "1501".
(D) in FIG. 72: When two frames (2F) have passed, the value of the payout point P increases by one and becomes "1502".
When the number of prize balls is small (for example, less than 10), the count-up effect can be executed carefully by setting the update interval to 2 frames.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an overview of the flow from the count-up SE reproduction with the number of prize balls of 9 and the update interval of 1F to the count-up SE stop.
In FIG. 73 (A): A small winning game has been started.
(B) in FIG. 73: When the game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, at the payout point P, the count-up effect is started. The display of the payout point P is "1500". In this case, a count-up counter is set, and reproduction of the count-up SE is started. The count-up counter is set to 9, which is the value of "(number of prize balls 9) x (update interval 1F)".
(C) in FIG. 73: When one frame (1F) elapses, the value of the payout point P increases by one and becomes "1501". After one frame has elapsed, the count-up counter is decremented (-1).
(D) in FIG. 73: After 8 frames (8F) have passed, the value of the payout point P increases by 8 and becomes "1509". After 8 frames have passed, the count up counter is decremented (-8).
In this case, since the count-up counter becomes 0, reproduction of the count-up SE ends (count-up SE stop).

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the outline of the flow from the count-up SE reproduction with the number of prize balls of 7 and the update interval of 2F to the count-up SE stop.
In FIG. 74 (A): A small winning game has been started.
(B) in FIG. 74: When the game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, at the payout point P, the count-up effect is started. The display of the payout point P is "1500". In this case, a count-up counter is set, and reproduction of the count-up SE is started. The count-up counter is set to 14, which is the value of "(number of prize balls 7)×(update interval 2F)".
(C) in FIG. 74: Since the update interval is 2F, even after one frame (1F) has passed, the value of the payout point P does not increase and is maintained at "1500". However, when one frame elapses, the count-up counter is decremented (-1).
(D) in FIG. 74: After one frame (1F) has passed, the value of the payout point P increases by one and becomes "1501". After one frame has elapsed, the count-up counter is decremented (-1).
(E) in FIG. 74: After 12 frames (12F) have passed, the value of the payout point P increases by 6 and becomes "1507". After 12 frames have passed, the count-up counter is decremented (-12).
In this case, since the count-up counter becomes 0, reproduction of the count-up SE ends (count-up SE stop).

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a small win during the small win rush.
Here, there is shown an example of winning a prize at a timing in which both the first and second small winnings can be produced.
In FIG. 75 (A): A small winning game has been started.
(B) in FIG. 75: When the first game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the first cut-in effect (the effect of displaying the character C1 from the left) is executed.
(C) in FIG. 75: When the second game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the second cut-in effect (the effect of displaying the character C2 from the right side) is executed.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a small prize after the second cut-in effect prohibition timing has elapsed.
Here, there is shown an example of winning a small prize at the timing when the first performance is permitted and the second performance is prohibited.
In FIG. 76 (A): A small winning game has been started.
(B) in FIG. 76: When the first game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the first cut-in effect (the effect of displaying the character C1 from the left side) is executed. Due to the effect of counting up the payout points P, the display of the payout points P is "1500".
(C) in FIG. 76: Even if the second game ball wins the second variable prize winning device 31 after the small win start 70F has passed, the second cut-in effect is not executed (second cut-in prohibited). Actually, the cut-in effect character is not displayed, and only the payout point P is displayed (the payout point P count-up effect is executed). Due to the effect of counting up the payout points P, the display of the payout points P is "1515".
(D) in FIG. 76: When the game ball further wins the second variable winning device 31, the cut-in effect character is not displayed, but the payout point P is displayed as "1530" due to the count-up effect.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a small prize after the first cut-in effect prohibition timing has elapsed.
Here, an example is shown in which the first and second small wins are won at the timing when the performance is prohibited.
In FIG. 77 (A): A small winning game has been started.
(B) in FIG. 77: Even if the first game ball wins the second variable winning device 31 after the start of the small hit 95F, the first cut-in effect is not executed (the first cut-in is prohibited). Actually, the cut-in effect character is not displayed, and only the payout point P is displayed (the payout point P count-up effect is executed). Due to the effect of counting up the payout points P, the display of the payout points P is "1500".
(C) in FIG. 77: After that, even if the second game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the second cut-in effect is not executed because it has already passed 70F from the start of the small hit ( No second cut-in allowed). Actually, the cut-in effect character is not displayed, and only the payout point P is displayed (the payout point P count-up effect is executed). Due to the effect of counting up the payout points P, the display of the payout points P is "1515".
(D) in FIG. 77: When the game ball further wins the second variable winning device 31, the cut-in effect character is not displayed, but the payout point P is displayed as "1530" due to the count-up effect.

As described above, according to this embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the reproduction of the count-up SE (second effect) is terminated based on the number of prize balls and the update interval. Even if there is, it can be handled with the same control, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the value (special value) of the count-up counter is calculated by multiplication, and the value of the count-up counter is updated to end the reproduction of the count-up SE. ) or the like can end the reproduction of the count-up SE, and the control process can be simplified.

(3) The update interval for counting up the number of balls won (payout point P) changes according to the number of small prize balls, but there is a possibility that the number of prize balls will change due to changes in specifications and the like. In that case, it is necessary to change the count-up update interval according to the change in the number of prize balls, and there is a problem that the program must be changed each time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a count-up production is performed when an attacker wins a small hit during a small win rush, and a count-up SE is reproduced in accordance with the production at that time, a count-up counter is prepared, and a counter is prepared when the attacker wins a prize. is set, and the counter is decremented by 1 every frame. Then, when the value of the count-up counter reaches 0, the count-up SE is stopped. When the attacker wins a prize, the value of the count-up counter is set as the number of winning balls (main command)×update interval (number of frames). As a result, even if the number of winning balls or update interval is changed due to specification change, the same control can be applied from reproduction to stop of the count-up SE.

(4) According to the present embodiment, a count-up counter is provided, and the set value of the count-up counter is set to "the number of prize balls x the update interval of the count-up." Control up to stop can be handled by the same control.

(5) According to the present embodiment, if the attacker wins again during the count-up effect, the current counter value is added to the "number of winning balls x count-up update interval", and counter subtraction is resumed. Since the game continues (continues), it is possible to deal with the winning during the reproduction of the count-up SE by the same control.

(6) According to the present embodiment, when a predetermined time has elapsed during execution of a small winning game, a specific effect prohibition section for prohibiting execution of a cut-in effect (specific effect) is set. It is possible to avoid execution of a cut-in performance at a late stage during execution of a winning game, and as a result, a novel game machine can be provided.

(7) According to the present embodiment, since the cut-in effect is prohibited by two prohibited sections (the first prohibited section and the second prohibited section), it is possible to flexibly adapt to situations where the cut-in effect is executed multiple times. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(8) According to the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is alternately displayed on the left and right even when the execution of the cut-in effect is prohibited by setting the specific effect prohibited section. Not only can it be sustained, but it is also possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

(9) At the time of winning the small winning game during the small winning rush, the cut-in effect is executed up to twice, but depending on the winning timing, the cut-in effect does not end at the end of the small winning game, or the next fluctuation is large. There is a problem that the cut-in effect may continue across parts.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the small win starts during the small win rush, the ACT dedicated to the small win is activated, and when the specified number of frames is reached, the first cut-in effect prohibition flag and the second cut-in effect prohibition flag are turned ON. to
Then, when an attacker wins a prize during a small winning game, the cut-in prohibition flag is referred to determine whether or not the character to be displayed is selected by lottery.
As a result, it is possible to execute the cut-in effect only at a timing that does not affect the next variation or does not greatly affect the next variation.

(10) In this embodiment, the "second cut-in prohibition flag" is set to ON after 70 frames have passed since the start of the small win, and the "first cut-in prohibition flag" is turned ON after 95 frames have passed since the start of the small win. , the cut-in effect can be performed only at a timing that does not affect the next variation or does not greatly affect the next variation.

The present invention can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of presentation given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of presentation described above.

In the embodiment described above, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not have a probability changing region has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that has a probability changing region.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called simultaneous rotating machine has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a non-simultaneous rotating machine.

Although the special game has been described as an example of a small winning game, it may be a big winning game or a normal electric accessory opening game.

Although the second effect has been described with the example of the sound effect (count-up SE), the effect may be an image effect or a light effect. Also, the second effect may be a combination of a sound effect, an image effect, and a light effect.

Although the example in which the number of prize balls and the update interval are fixed has been described, they may be changed according to the game state and the progress of the game.
The object of the count-up counter (contents of the number of prize balls for calculating the count-up counter) may be not only the prize ball content command but also the number of prize balls accompanying winning at the starting port.
The prize ball content command may be provided with a prize ball type (difference in the number of prize balls), and the update interval, the character to be displayed, and the count-up SE may be changed according to the prize ball type (difference in the number of prize balls).

The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and can be appropriately modified. Also, the structure and board configuration of the pachinko machine 1, specific numerical values, etc., including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and these can be modified as appropriate.

FIG. 78 is a front view of a pachinko machine of another embodiment. Also, FIG. 79 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. In addition, in the following description, basically, the same description as in the above-described embodiment is omitted, but some parts are redundantly described. Further, with respect to the reference numerals in the drawings, some portions are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the above-described embodiment, and other portions are provided with different reference numerals. A major difference between the above-described embodiment and other embodiments is that a decoration unit is attached to the upper front portion of the pachinko machine of other embodiments. A pachinko machine according to another embodiment will be described below.

The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. can be converted into a game value based on the number of The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

Here, in this specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated facing the pachinko machine 1 is defined as left, the right side as viewed from the player is defined as right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is defined as up. The lower side viewed from the player is referred to as the bottom, the near side viewed from the player is referred to as the front, and the far side viewed from the player is referred to as the rear.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. When the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side disables the opening of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the lock. .

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

The pachinko machine 1 also includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (game area where game balls flow down, board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that game balls can flow down.

[Structure of ball plate]
The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. In the lower tray 6c, the game balls put out while the upper tray 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are received from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6c) is paid out.

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of points (for example, 5 points) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit is displayed on this frequency display section. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. Although the example of the model connected to the card unit is described in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. In addition, the player can drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by pushing the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e backward. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . A player can operate the shooting control board set 174 by operating the handle unit 16 to shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmills. The configuration inside the game area 8a will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper side of the tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate an upper glass frame speaker 54, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each incorporate an in-glass frame speaker 55. is built in. On the other hand, an inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and an outer frame speaker 56 is installed in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, and 58 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

[Operation member]
An operation unit 60 (operating means) is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 so as to protrude from the upper tray 6b toward the upper front side. The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in its center and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64 . The operation unit 60 is capable of receiving operations in various scenes shown on the production. The player pulls the handle lever 62 toward the front side in one scene of the performance, and pushes the push button 64 in another scene. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbols are changing, the big win is being confirmed, or the big win is being displayed. During the game, it is possible to generate some kind of effects (announcement effects, variable probability promotion effects, promotion effects during big roles, etc.).

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64 . Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped part 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pull-in operation of the handle lever 62. As shown in FIG. In addition, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells that are separated at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These cells cannot be operated by the player, but they are effectively used to inform the player of the operation method.

When the player is requested to perform some kind of operation, a reduced image representing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . At this time, each cell of the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if it were a lamp, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (effective operation time). be. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. When the remaining time runs out, all the cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on/off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced image displayed on the screen. By switching the lighting/lighting out of the portion 65 in this manner, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is structured so as to protrude greatly upward when a predetermined trigger occurs during the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it protrudes to a height approximately three times higher than normal. Push button 64 has a light source therein. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or in multiple colors, but when it is protruding, it can emit more colorful light to exhibit a strong presence. Such an operation of the push button 64 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

Although the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60 in this embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Moreover, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a directional key 66 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation section 14 . The direction key 66 is composed of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions arranged in a cross shape, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the effect.

[Decoration unit]
A decoration unit 800 is attached to the front upper portion of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁The decoration unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined attachment member (mechanical mechanism such as screws and hooks). Note that the decoration unit 800 may be one that cannot be removed from the pachinko machine 1 .
The decoration unit 800 (decoration) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decoration unit 800 is a cubic member on which predetermined character information is displayed. luminous.

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 79, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, a payout control board unit 176, and a back cover. A unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main controller in a visible manner in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs. Four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments that can display decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located on the lower right of the 7 segments. It is Performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing the RAM, that is, for initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main control device, and in this embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required to change or refer to the game setting of the pachinko machine 1 .

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

The positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the keyhole 306 for setting keys are merely examples, and can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be arranged outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). , can store game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, hall computer, etc.). and various external information signals representing maintenance status etc. .

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 80 is a front view showing a single game board unit 8 of another embodiment. The game board unit 8 has a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a substantially circular launch rail (no reference numeral). The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁The left part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (jackpot game state, small winning game state, low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state, etc.) is the second game area (right hitting area R, specific area) used in. The left portion of the game area 8a is also used in the high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31 and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning port 26 , and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 . Furthermore, the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the single normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged at the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. there is

A game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters a middle starting prize winning port 26 and normal winning prize ports 22 and 24 in the process of flowing down, passes through a starting gate 20, and is a variable starting prize winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter mainly the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the starting gate 20, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball will enter, the ball will enter the second variable prize winning device 31 during the opening operation, or the ball will enter the normal prize winning opening 24. - 特許庁The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but there are a middle starting winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning opening. A game ball entered into the device 31 is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a game board (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. that constitute the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the left side area (left-handed hitting) in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "left hit") in the area).

On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the variable start-up winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right side of the game area 8a (right-handed area ) (executing the so-called “right-handed hitting”).

In this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, the right start It is possible to enter the ball into the winning hole 28a (predetermined ball entry hole) (ordinary electric accessories). The variable start-up winning device 28 is provided with a tongue-type opening/closing member 28b. In the illustrated state, the opening/closing member 28b is in a position (retreat position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning hole 28a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 28b moves to the position (driving position) where the opening/closing member 28b protrudes forward from the board surface, the opening/closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right It becomes possible or easier for the ball to enter the start winning opening 28a). The variable start-up winning device 28 may be a device that opens the right start-up prize opening by displacing the opening/closing member so as to fall forward with its lower edge portion as a hinge.

The first variable winning device 30, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win or a small win), a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big win game) 5th round or 7th round to 10th round condition, condition that the small winning game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning hole 30b. (special electric accessory, first special entry event generating means).

The first variable prize winning device 30 is a device (upper attacker) arranged below the variable starting prize winning device 28, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the drawing, the opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the first big prize winning port 30b cannot be won (the first big prize winning port 30b is closed). be. When the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right side with its lower edge portion as a hinge, thereby opening the first big prize winning port 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not disabled, and an event of winning into the first big winning hole 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big winning hole 30b. A game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30b passes through the first count switch 84 and is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a recovery passage (no reference numeral) after the winning is detected.

The second variable winning device 31, when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode), is a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the jackpot game). condition) is satisfied, and allows the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b (specific winning hole) (special electric accessory, second special winning ball event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device (lower attacker) arranged below the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening/closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is of a type in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player side. is impossible or difficult (the second big winning hole 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board to open the second big prize winning port 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible (possible or easy), and can generate the event of the ball entering the second big winning hole 31b.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guiding passage 31c for guiding a game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guiding path 31c extends leftward and downward from the second big prize winning opening 31b and branches into two at the tip.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a variable probability region blade member 31d and a variable probability region hole 31e are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge area) is arranged on the lower left side of 31c.

A game ball entering the second variable winning device 31 is first detected by the second count switch 85 as entering. Here, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted further from the board surface, and the game ball is guided to the probability variable area hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variable region solenoid for operating the probability variable region blade member 31d is OFF, the probability variable region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruded to the front side from the board surface, so that the game The ball passes through the upper portion of the blade member 31d for the variable probability region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probable variable area (specific area)]
Further, a variable probability region (no reference numeral) is provided inside the variable probability region hole 31e. The variable probability area is an area through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in a closed state, and the blade member 31d for the variable probability region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in an open state. If it is, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

There is a possibility that the variable probability area blade member 31d will operate during the big hit game. The operation pattern of the variable probability region blade member 31d opens the variable probability region for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closes the variable probability region for a long period of time after closing it for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds). Apply either a long open pattern that opens long (for example, about 20 seconds) or a short open pattern that only opens the probability variable area for a short period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the start of the round. . Which operation pattern to operate the variable probability area blade member 31d can be selected according to the winning pattern. Specifically, a long open pattern for long opening the probability variable area is selected when the probability variable pattern is won, and a short open pattern for short opening the probability variable area is selected when the normal pattern is won.

In addition, the operation pattern of the probability variable region blade member 31d applies only the pattern in which the probability variable region blade member 31d opens long, and when the first variable winning device 30 opens short and the round ends, the probability variable region It is also possible to eliminate the opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time. In addition, since the game ball does not reach the variable probability region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the probability variable region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state is shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state after the big win game ends. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (high-probability time-reduction state). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area during the big win game, the state shifts to a low probability state after the big win game is over. At this time, the state may be shifted from the non-time-reduction state to the time-reduction state (low-probability time-reduction state).

A performance unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from its central position to its right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the production unit 40, and various production images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including production patterns corresponding to special patterns. . Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. - 特許庁Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorations (including movable bodies and light-emitting bodies) are arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) can add decorativeness. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42 .

In addition, inside the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, an ornament imitating the shape of a spade). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. The effect using these movable bodies 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the medium start winning opening 26 immediately below. . At the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, a blade member that is always movable by a solenoid (not shown) is arranged, and at the exit of the ball guide passage 40d, a sorting device that is always movable by a solenoid (not shown) A device for sorting whether to induce or not) may be arranged.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not enter (win a prize) in various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32.例文帳に追加In addition, including the game ball entering the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, is driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that are caught are recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
81 is a schematic diagram showing a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 78. FIG. FIG. 81 shows a cross section taken along a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end of the game area 8a (the top, the upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)). The cross section shown in FIG. 81 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. Also, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. As shown in FIG. In addition, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decoration unit 800 is positioned above the lower end of the game ball X (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a. is doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position indicated by the dashed line Y in FIG. 81).

In addition, the protruding portion 856 protrudes downward from the center of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in this state. More specifically, the lower end of the projecting portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in this state. Also, the protruding portion 856 protrudes downward from the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500 .

As is clear from the above, the decoration unit 800 overlaps the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , to cover the entire game ball X in that state. In addition, in the decoration unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front portion of the upper end of the game area 8a) extends in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , at least the lower half of the game ball X positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a is not overlapped, and at least the lower half of the game ball in this state is not covered. A rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854 . Therefore, even when the game ball is positioned at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily visually recognize the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in this state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically from the player's eye point, without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. A player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when playing a game while sitting on a chair. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a portion of the game ball in this state is maintained without the player moving his or her face up, down, left, or right. (Lower half) should be visible. That is, the decoration unit 800 is arranged on a straight line from a predetermined point at a distance of less than 50 to 90 cm from the glass unit G to the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a (the part below the center of the game ball X). It should be designed so that it does not get wet.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) Equipped with a front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) on the upper part and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8). It is a game machine that has
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) Above the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right hitting area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (an outer peripheral surface 502, the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (an inner peripheral surface 504, the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Among the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(7) Among the vertical lines intersecting the first reference line L1 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the first reference line L1 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The game ball has a diameter of about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1, and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can.
In addition, even though the design part is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball is hit strongly (the game ball passage ), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending perpendicular to the game board surface, the portion located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the portion on the right side of point B, the portion on the left side of point B, the portion that will be point B ) is defined as a second reference line L2.
(11) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The rearmost part of the lower surface of the part is defined as a first design part D1.
(12) Among the vertical lines intersecting the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the second reference line L2 can intersect, among the portions where the vertical line intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersects the design part), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the part is defined as a second design part D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so the design portion can be enlarged. can. In addition, even though the design portion is enlarged in this way, by setting the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design portion D1 to be equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is weakly launched (the game ball path When the game ball rolls along the bottom surface of the), visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure.

[Arrangement of positioning holes for outer rail]
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail and a rail base. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing how a game ball contacts the outer rail. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 82, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-shaped horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the mounting position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined. Hole 602 is smaller in size than guide 601 .

A distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end of the outer rail 600 (lower end in the drawing) is set to 2.7 mm. In other words, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where a game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit it. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where game balls rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 do not hit.

As shown in FIG. 83, a rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, and a curved outer rail 600 is arranged on a curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. As shown in FIG. A plurality of projecting portions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601 .

As shown in FIG. 84 , the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 . The projecting portion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into the predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600 , thereby positioning the outer rail 600 on the rail base 700 . Here, the projecting portion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 85, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, and passes from the starting end (PS) of the lower left outer rail 600 through the left end (PL) of the left outer rail 600 to the upper It is curved to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the upper right outer rail 600 .

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has predetermined guide portions 601 (many holes for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for attaching positioning pins, cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701) for guiding the mounting position to the game board. are formed. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with holes 602 that are used when the outer rail 600 is machined.
(3) In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 to the upper end (PU) is defined as a second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater in the first range (H1) (eg, 3) than in the second range (H2) (eg, 2), and is larger than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the side of the ball launching device, which receives a large impact from the game ball and requires particularly accurate placement of the outer rail 600, and the deviation of the outer rail 600 on the side of the ball launching device is prevented. and vibration can be reliably prevented.
In addition, a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the end side of the outer rail 600, which receives less impact from the game ball and has less influence on the game, so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), and the third number in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(6) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the third range (H3) in the first range (H1), and the third range (H2) in the second range (H2). range (H3) or more.
(7) In place of (4) above, the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is greater than or equal to the second range (H2) in the first range (H1), range (H3) or more.
(8) Predetermined guide portions 601 are not formed at the upper vertex (PU) and left vertex (PL) of the outer rail 600 .

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game ball does not come into contact (for example, a position away from the trajectory where the game ball contacts).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball is less likely to flow forward.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at uneven intervals.

(13) In place of the above (3) and (4), the range from the starting end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the fourth range (H4 ), and the range from the left end (PL) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a fifth range (H5). number) is larger than the fifth range (H5) (eg, two).
(14) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is set to the sixth range (H6 ), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a seventh range (H7), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is within the sixth range (H6) (for example, five ) is larger than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in the state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the eighth range (H8 ), and the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is a ninth range (H9), the predetermined number of guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4 number) is larger than the ninth range (H9) (eg, one number).
By adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized, and the game can be played according to the design value.

The invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail] and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail] may be combined. The invention having the configuration, the invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail], and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail] may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball and playing the game as designed. In addition, by stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the bottom side of the decoration unit.

[Dimensions of the finger hook of the handle]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 0 degrees (minimum angle), and FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the periphery of a steering wheel with an operating angle of 100 degrees (maximum angle).
The handle 950 (firing handle) is a circular member shaped like a dome. The handle 950 has three radially protruding finger hooks 952 (952a, 952b, 952c) around a central circular member.
As shown in FIG. 86, when the handle 950 is not operated, the first finger hook 952a located on the left side of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side of the player's right thumb. When the handle 950 is not operated, the second finger hook 952b located above the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side of the player's right index finger. Furthermore, when the handle 950 is not operated, the third finger hook portion 952c located diagonally to the upper right of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side of the middle finger of the player's right hand.
The handle 950 is rotatable from an initial position (the position shown in FIG. 86) to a maximum rotation position (the position shown in FIG. 87).

A distance D1 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the first finger hook portion 952a is, for example, 53.4 mm.
A distance D2 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the second finger hook portion 952b is, for example, 45.6 mm.
A distance D3 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the third finger hook portion 952c is, for example, 39.3 mm.
A distance E from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the handle 950 is, for example, 34.6 mm.
A distance F from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 40.0 mm. Note that the distance from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 45.0 mm.
A distance G from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 49.1 mm. The distance from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 51.1 mm.
These numerical values are merely examples, and can be appropriately changed according to game specifications and the like.

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) A body frame (front door and middle door) having a front frame (front door, integrated door unit 4) and an inner frame (middle door, inner frame assembly 7), and an outer frame (outer door) to which the body frame can be attached. It is a game machine provided with a frame unit 2).
(2) The body frame has a handle 950 (firing handle, handle unit 16).
(3) The handle 950 has a finger hook portion 952 .
(4) The handle 950 is rotatable from the initial position to the maximum rotation position.
(5) When the handle 950 is at the initial position, the finger hook 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame (the lower edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(6) When the handle 950 is at the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the body frame.

As a result, even when the body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hook portion 952 does not come into contact with the floor or the like, and the handle 950 is not damaged. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of component damage.

(7) The finger hooking portion 952 may not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame at any rotational position of the handle 950 .
(8) When the handle 950 is in the initial position, the finger hook 952 does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the body frame (the right edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(9) When the handle 950 is at the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the body frame.
(10) The finger hook portion 952 may not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the body frame regardless of the rotational position of the handle 950 .
(11) Assuming that the finger hooking portion having the largest protrusion amount is the maximum finger hooking portion (first finger hooking portion 952a), the tip (PT) of the maximum finger hooking portion reaches the lowest point ( PB).

[Handle Torque]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 1).
The torque (operation torque) of the handle in Example 1 is 6.8 N mm required for the initial movement, and 13.6 N mm required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position. The torque required to rotate the handle to the right-handed reference position is 23.8 N·mm. The handle that has moved to the right-handed reference position returns to the origin by the reaction force of the spring.

In addition, in the handle of Example 1, the amount of movement from the initial position (initial movement) to the left-handed reference position (hereinafter referred to as "movement amount A") is 6.8 mm. The amount of movement to the reference position (hereinafter referred to as "movement amount B") is 10.2 mm. Although not shown, the operation angle to the left-handed reference position is 49.0 degrees, and the operation angle to the right-handed reference position is 100.0 degrees. Regarding the amount of movement, A<B (6.8<10.2) and 2A>B (13.6>10.2).

As described above, the handle of Example 1 reduces the operation torque required for the initial movement, minimizes the amount of movement, and flattens the torque curve.

The torque of the steering wheel in the comparative example is 31 Nmm for initial movement, and 69 Nmm for rotating the steering wheel to the reference position for left-handed driving. is 152 N·mm.

Further, in the handle of the comparative example, the amount of movement A is 38 mm and the amount of movement B is 83 mm. That is, A<B (38<83) but not 2A>B (76<83).

As described above, the steering wheel of the comparative example has a high initial torque and abrupt torque transfer, so that the driver is very easily fatigued.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 2).
The torque of the handle in Example 2 is 27.2 Nmm for initial movement, 54.4 Nmm for rotating the handle to the reference position for right-handed hitting. The torque required to rotate the handle to is 95.2 N·mm.

Further, in the handle of Example 2, the amount of movement A is 27.2 mm, and the amount of movement B is 40.8 mm. That is, A<B (27.2<40.8) and 2A>B (54.4>40.8).

As described above, in the handle of Example 2, the operation torque required for the initial movement is slightly larger than that of Example 1, but smaller than that of the comparative example. It is hard to get tired even if you play games.

The torque of the handle of the comparative example is the same as in FIG.

The following features can be derived from the configuration shown in these figures. The gaming machine may include at least one of the following parenthesized configurations.
(1) A first operation torque (6.8 N·mm) is defined as an operation torque required for rotating the steering wheel from the initial position (required for initial movement).
(2) Assume that the second operation torque (13.6 N·mm) is the operation torque required to rotate the steering wheel from the initial position to the left-handed reference position (backward position).
(3) The third operation torque (23.8 N·mm) is the operation torque required for rotating the handle from the initial position to the maximum rotation position (right-handed reference position, full stroke position).
(4) The second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque.
(5) The third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque.
(6) The third operating torque is less than or equal to twice the second operating torque.

In this way, since the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small, the operation torque does not increase sharply between the left-handed reference position and the maximum rotation position, and the player can apply the second operation torque. and the third operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(7) Furthermore, the second operation torque is twice or less than the first operation torque.
In this way, since the difference between the first operation torque and the second operation torque is small, the operation torque does not increase sharply between the initial position and the left-handed reference position, and the player can apply the first operation torque. and the second operation torque is felt to be small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(8) A first operation angle (45 to 60 degrees) is defined as an operation angle from the initial position of the handle to the left-handed reference position.
(9) A second operation angle (100 to 120 degrees) is defined as the operation angle from the initial position of the handle to the maximum rotation position.
(10) The first operating angle (eg, 45 degrees) is half or less than the second operating angle (eg, 100 degrees).

By adopting the configuration described in [Handle Torque], it is possible to provide a handle unit that minimizes the operation torque and its movement (displacement) so that the player does not get tired even in long-time right-handed games. The shooting handle (handle operating portion) is structured to return to the origin by a spring, but the player always plays by operating in the direction opposite to the spring reaction force. By reducing the initial torque of this reaction force and minimizing the amount of movement (displacement), it is possible to provide a handle unit that is less tiring. Specifically, in the first and second embodiments described above, the initial torque is suppressed to the minimum force that can return to the origin, and the torque curve is flattened to realize a handle unit that does not cause fatigue.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 26 upper starting winning opening 27 right starting winning opening 28 variable starting winning device 30 first variable winning device 31 second variable winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol working memory Lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory lamp 35a 2nd special symbol operation memory lamp 38 game state display device 42 liquid crystal display 45 effect switching button 70 main control device 72 main Control CPU
74 ROMs
76 RAM
124 effect control device 126 effect control CPU

Claims (1)

a variable ball entry device capable of transitioning from a closed state to an open state;
special game execution means for executing a special game using the variable ball entry device when a predetermined lottery is won;
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect triggered by the ball entry when a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game;
The specific effect execution means is
When a predetermined condition is set, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry device during execution of the special game, the specific effect may not be executed,
a front frame on which a design portion is formed;
a game board on which a game area having a left-handed area and a right-handed area is formed;
a guide passage disposed above the game area, having an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface, and guiding a game ball to the right-handed area;
Among the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board, a line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as a first reference line,
Among the portions where the vertical line with respect to the first reference line can intersect, the rearmost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the first design portion,
Among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line intersect, if the lowermost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is the second design portion,
The first design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball,
The gaming machine, wherein the second design portion is positioned below the first reference line and is at a distance from the first reference line equal to or greater than the diameter of a game ball.

Images